Symantec Netbackup 7.5 For Unix: Install, Configure, and Deploy (Appendix B)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 338

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

Symantec NetBackup
7.5 for UNIX: Install,
Configure, and
Deploy (Appendix B)

100-002743-B2
COURSE DEVELOPER Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Cheryl Faulkner Symantec, the Symantec Logo, and VERITAS are trademarks or
Kris Faulkner registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in
John Gerhardson the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of
Lisa Goldring their respective owners.
Tomer Gurantz THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL
Steven Schwartze EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS
Sandy Tipper AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
Robyn Winkler WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE
LEAD SUBJECT MATTER
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH
EXPERTS DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
Christopher Amidei SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
Peter Farley INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
Bob Farnsworth CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE,
Joseph Gallagher OR USE OF THIS PUBLICATION. THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
Micke Ostrom
NOTICE.
Robert Owen
Kleber Saldanha No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the written
Christopher Winter
permission of the publisher.
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
TECHNICAL Symantec Corporation
CONTRIBUTORS AND World Headquarters
REVIEWERS 350 Ellis Street
The NetBackup 7.5 Mountain View, CA 94043
Advisory Board United States
http://www.symantec.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


2
Table of Contents
Appendix B: Lab Solutions
Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation).................. B-3
Exercise 1: Starting virtual machines in VMware Workstation.............. B-10
Exercise 2: Logging on to virtual machines (VMware Workstation)...... B-16
Exercise 3: Adjusting the VMware view (VMware Workstation) ........... B-24
Exercise 4: Running basic commands (VMware Workstation) ............. B-26
Exercise 5: Using SSH (VMware Workstation) ..................................... B-29
Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) ...................................... B-31
Exercise 1: Connecting to the lab environment (Hatsize) ..................... B-38
Exercise 2: Connecting to additional virtual machines (Hatsize) .......... B-41
Exercise 3: Running basic commands (Hatsize) .................................. B-45
Lab 2: Installing NetBackup........................................................................ B-53
Exercise 1: Verifying the Linux-based 7.5 master server installation.... B-56
Exercise 2: Verifying the Linux-based 7.5 media server installation..... B-65
Exercise 3: Verifying the Linux-based 7.5 client installation ................. B-74
Exercise 4: Verifying the Windows-based 7.5 client installation ........... B-80
Exercise 5: Verifying a Windows-based media server installation........ B-85
Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces .............................. B-93
Exercise 1: Exploring the NetBackup Administration Console.............. B-94
Exercise 2: Exploring the OpsCenter Web interface........................... B-102
Exercise 3: Exploring the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI ............ B-107
Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media ........................................... B-111
Exercise 1: Verify tape devices are visible to OS of media servers.... B-112
Exercise 2: Configure tape devices and storage units using the Configure
Storage devices wizard....................................................................... B-117
Exercise 3: Verify the tape device and storage unit configuration ...... B-124
Exercise 4: Configure volume pools ................................................... B-130
Exercise 5: Configure volumes using the Configure Volumes wizard. B-135
Exercise 6: Verifying the volume and volume pool configuration........ B-142
Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage .............................................................. B-147
Exercise 1: Configuring basic disk storage units ................................ B-148
Exercise 2: Configuring AdvancedDisk............................................... B-155
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Exercise 3: Viewing the status of disk storage.................................... B-166


Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups ................................................. B-173
Exercise 1: Configuring polices used to perform file system backups B-174
Exercise 2: Viewing a policy used to perform file system backups..... B-181
Exercise 3: Copying and modifying policies used for file system backups ...
B-185
Exercise 4: Applying what you have learned ...................................... B-189
Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores............................ B-195
Exercise 1: Initiating manual backups using the NetBackup Administration
Console............................................................................................... B-196
Exercise 2: Using the BAR GUI to perform file system restores to the original
folder location on the client ................................................................. B-207
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
3 Table of Contents iii
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 3: Using the BAR GUI to perform a file system restore to an alter-
nate folder location on the client......................................................... B-216
Exercise 4: Using the BAR GUI to perform a file system restore to an alter-
nate Windows-based client system .................................................... B-221
Exercise 5: Using the BAR GUI to perform a file system restore to a Linux-
based client system............................................................................ B-228
Exercise 6: Using OpsCenter Operational Restore to perform a file system
restores .............................................................................................. B-237
Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data ................................................................ B-245
Exercise 1: Performing manual duplication of backup images........... B-246
Exercise 2: Configuring and using the inline copy feature ................. B-255
Exercise 3: Configuring and using a Storage Lifecycle Policy ........... B-261
Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration....................................... B-271
Exercise 1: Running NetBackup reports for media and images......... B-272
Exercise 2: Verifying, expiring, and importing images........................ B-284
Exercise 3: Configuring for NetBackup catalog backup ..................... B-309
Exercise 4: Performing a catalog backup........................................... B-317
Exercise 5: Recovering the NetBackup catalogs ............................... B-322

Symantec Acronym Glossary


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


4 iv Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Appendix B
Lab Solutions
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


5
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


6 B–2 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)


This lab activity provides you with an introduction to the lab delivery environment
used for this course, enabling you to successfully navigate and use the lab systems
provided for the course.
Symantec NetBackup courses may be delivered in a number of settings:
• In a traditional classroom, with physical systems provided for performing lab
activities
• In a virtual classroom, with online access provided to lab systems
Regardless of the setting in which you attend this NetBackup 7.5 Administration
course, the lab environment is provided using virtual lab systems. The lab systems
are deployed using one of two delivery platforms:
• VMware Workstation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• The Hatsize delivery platform


The user interfaces provided in these two lab delivery environments differ. This
lab introduction activity provides you with practice navigating and performing
typical activities related to the use of the virtual machines provided for this course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


7 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–3
Lab environment overview
The labs for this course are performed within a virtual environment consisting of
six virtual machines, as illustrated on the slide. This virtual environment has been
developed specifically for this course and is described in the following sections.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


8 B–4 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Virtual machine configuration


The lab activities for this course use the six virtual machines identified on the slide
and in Table 1. The introductory page of each lab activity identifies the virtual
machines that are used in the lab activity. Icons, such as those shown in the first
column on the slide, are displayed to indicate which virtual machine is used to
perform each of the lab steps.

System Name Description Fully Qualified Host Name


vtl Virtual tape library with two vtl.example.com
tape drives
lnxmaster NetBackup 7.5 master/EMM/ lnxmaster.example.com
media server
lnxmedia NetBackup 7.5 media server lnxmedia.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winclient NetBackup 7.5 client winclient.example.com


lnxclient NetBackup 7.5 client lnxclient.example.com
winserver OpsCenter 7.5 server and winserver.example.com
NetBackup media server
Table 1: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

Note: In the following exercises, the virtual machines are identified by the system
names listed in Table 1.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


9 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–5
Virtual machine account information
Refer to Table 2 for the logon credentials for each of the virtual machines used in
this lab environment. For most lab steps, log on to the virtual machines using the
student user ID. In some cases, the lab instructions may direct you to log on to a
virtual machine as the Administrator or root user.

System Student Logon Administrator Logon


Credentials Credentials
lnxmaster User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxmedia User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winclient User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winserver User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxclient User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
vtl User: root
Password: veritas1
Table 2: Virtual Machine logon credentials

Accessing virtual machines


How and where you attend the NetBackup 7.5 Administration class determines
how you access to the virtual machines in the lab environment. Your instructor will
direct you to the appropriate set of lab procedures for the environment you are
using in this class.
• If you are working with VMware Workstation, in either a physical or virtual
classroom, continue to the VMware Workstation introduction section on the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

following page.
• If you are working with Hatsize, locate and complete the Lab introduction
exercise for Hatsize.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


10 B–6 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

VMware Workstation introduction


In this lab activity, you become familiar with the lab environment used in the
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy course, including the
methods used to access the lab systems.
The hands-on portion of this lab activity enables you to perform basic operations
on virtual machines, as shown on the VMware Workstation introduction slide.
Adopting the best practice guidelines provided in this lab enables you to perform
the remaining lab activities of this course more efficiently.

Note: Only use these exercises if the class is using the VMware Workstation lab
environment. Instructions for Hatsize lab environments are located in a
separate lab activity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two parallel versions of the lab activities included in this course enable you to
choose the level of detail that suits your NetBackup experience level:
• Appendix A provides step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete lab instructions and solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


11 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–7
VMware Workstation lab environment
In the VMware Workstation lab environment, each of the virtual machines is
connected to a single virtual network residing on the host machine. You use the
VMware Workstation user interface on the host machine to access the console of
the virtual machines.
In this lab environment, the majority of lab steps are performed on the NetBackup
7.5 master server that is running on the lnxmaster virtual machine. As you
work through the lab steps, the lab instructions direct you to select the virtual
machine that is used to perform the lab steps.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


12 B–8 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

VMware Workstation interface


The screen shot on the slide shows the summary view of VMware Workstation
user interface. This view provides access to the virtual machines.
To access the console of a virtual machine, click the tab associated with the name
of the virtual machine. On the slide shown on this page, the tab for the vtl virtual
machine was selected.
If a virtual machine is in the powered-off state, when you click the tab for the
virtual machine, the body of the VMware Workstation user interface provides
information about the virtual machine. The VMware Workstation tool bar and the
Commands area of the user interface enable you to perform operations on the
virtual machine, such as “Power the virtual machine on.”
When the virtual machine is powered on, the body of the VMware Workstation
user interface displays the console of the virtual machine, enabling you to interact
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

with the virtual machine as you would with a physical system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


13 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–9
Exercise 1: Starting virtual machines in VMware Workstation

In this exercise, you start the virtual machines in your lab environment. This is
equivalent to booting or powering on the virtual machines.

Note: It is imperative that you start the virtual machines in the order specified in
Table 3. Failure to start the virtual machines in the specified order may
cause tape device failures and the subsequent failure of backup and restore
operations that use the tape devices.

Startup
order Virtual Machine Name Description
1 vtl.example.com Virtual tape library with two
tape drives; shared by
lnxmaster and
lnxmedia
2 lnxmaster.example.com NetBackup 7.5 master/
EMM/media server
3 lnxmedia.example.com NetBackup 7.5 media server
4 winclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
5 lnxclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
6 winserver.example.com OpsCenter 7.5 server and
NetBackup media server
Table 3: Virtual Machine startup order

1 If VMware Workstation is not already running, start it now.


Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a On the desktop of your host system, double-click the VMware


Workstation icon.

b Select View > Current View > Summary.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


14 B–10 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The VMware Workstation user interface is displayed, as shown in the
following screen shot.

2 Review the current Devices settings for each virtual machine.

Solution

a To select a virtual machine, click the tab for the virtual machine.

b Use the Summary view to locate the Devices tab and review the
configuration information for the virtual machine.

c Click each of the remaining virtual machine tabs and review the Devices
tab information for each virtual machine.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


15 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–11
vtl

3 Start the vtl virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the vtl tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Wait until the virtual machine has started and the login prompt is displayed.
End of Solution

lnxmaster

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


16 B–12 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: Always start and stop virtual machines in the specified order, and wait
for the previous virtual machine to load prior to starting another virtual
machine.
B

4 Start the lnxmaster virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the lnxmaster tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.


End of Solution

lnxmedia

5 Start the lnxmedia virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the lnxmedia tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.


End of Solution

winclient
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
17 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–13
6 Start the winclient virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the winclient tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.


End of Solution

lnxclient

7 Start the lnxclient virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the lnxclient tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Wait until the login window is displayed on the RedHat desktop.


End of Solution

winserver

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


18 B–14 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
8 Start the winserver virtual machine.

Solution

B
a In VMware, click the winserver tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.


End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


19 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–15
Exercise 2: Logging on to virtual machines (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you log on to each virtual machine to become familiar with the
logon procedures and credentials for each system.

Note: Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to access the console of the
vtl virtual machine. Do not log on to the vtl virtual machine unless
directed to do so by your instructor.

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.
– User name: student
– Password: training

lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the lnxmaster tab.

a On the desktop of lnxmaster, click the mouse to establish keyboard


control.

b Click the entry for the student user ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


20 B–16 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
c When prompted, type training in the password field, and click Log In
(or press Enter).

Wait until the RedHat Linux desktop is displayed before continuing.


End of Solution
B

2 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Solution

a Navigate to System > About this Computer on the desktop of the


lnxmaster system.

b When the System Monitor window is displayed, record the fully qualified
host name of the system, and the operating system version information.

c Close the System Monitor window.

End of Solution

Fully qualified host name: lnxmaster.example.com


lnxclient OS version: RedHat Enterprise Linux Server 6.1

3 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

Solution

a Double-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of lnxmaster to open a


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

terminal window.

b At the command prompt, type the following command, and press Enter.

ifconfig eth1
End of Solution

lnxmaster IP address for eth1: 10.10.2.13

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


21 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–17
lnxmedia

4 Access the console of the lnxmedia virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student


– Password: training

Solution

a Click the lnxmedia tab.

b On the desktop of lnxmedia, click the mouse to establish keyboard


control.

c Click the entry for the student user ID.

d When prompted, type training in the password field, and click Log In
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

(or press Enter).

Wait until the RedHat Linux desktop is displayed before continuing.


End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


22 B–18 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Solution
B

a Navigate to System > About this Computer on the desktop of the


lnxmedia system.

b When the System Monitor window is displayed, record the fully qualified
host name of the system, and the operating system version information.

c Close the System Monitor window.

End of Solution

Fully qualified host name: lnxmedia.example.com


lnxmedia OS version: RedHat Enterprise Linux Server 6.1

6 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

Solution

a Double-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of lnxmedia to open a


terminal window.

b At the command prompt, type the following command, and press Enter.

ifconfig eth1
End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia IP address for eth1: 10.10.2.14

winclient

7 Access the console of the winclient virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


23 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–19
– User name: student
– Password: training
Solution

a Click the winclient tab.

b On the desktop of winclient, click the mouse to establish keyboard


control.

c From the VMware tool bar, select VM > Send Ctrl+Alt+Del.

d Click the icon to select the student user ID.

e When prompted, type the password for the student user ID.

› User name: student


› Password: training

f To log on, click the blue logon arrow or press Enter on your keyboard.

Wait until the Windows desktop is displayed before continuing.


End of Solution

Record the IP address assigned to this system and the operating system used by
the system.

winclient IP address: 10.10.2.101


winclient OS version: Windows 2008 R2 Service Pack 1

lnxclient
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Access the console of the lnxclient virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student


– Password: training

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


24 B–20 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Solution

a Click the lnxclient tab.

b On the desktop of lnxclient, click the mouse to establish keyboard


control.

c Click the entry for the student user ID.

d When prompted, type training in the password field, and click Log In
(or press Enter).

Wait until the RedHat Linux desktop is displayed before continuing.


End of Solution

9 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Navigate to System > About this Computer on the desktop of the


lnxclient system.

b When the System Monitor window is displayed, record the fully qualified
host name of the system, and the operating system version information.

c Close the System Monitor window.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


25 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–21
Fully qualified host name: lnxclient.example.com
lnxclient OS version: RedHat Enterprise Linux Server 6.1

10 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

Solution

a Double-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of lnxclient to open a


terminal window.

b At the command prompt, type the following command, and press Enter.

ifconfig eth1
End of Solution

lnxclient IP address for eth1: 10.10.2.102

winserver

11 Access the console of the winserver virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student


– Password: training
Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Click the winserver tab.

b On the desktop of winserver, click the mouse to establish keyboard


control.

c From the VMware tool bar, select VM > Send Ctrl+Alt+Del.

d Click the icon to select the student user ID.

e When prompted, type the password for the student user ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


26 B–22 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
› User name: student
› Password: training

f To log on, click the blue logon arrow or press Enter on your keyboard.
B
Wait until the Windows desktop is displayed before continuing.
End of Solution

Record the IP address and the operating system version of the system in the
space provided.

winserver IP address: 10.10.2.21


winserver OS version: Windows 2008 R2 Service Pack 1
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


27 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–23
Exercise 3: Adjusting the VMware view (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you adjust the VMware view controls to become familiar with
navigating a virtual machine.

lnxmaster

1 In the VMware Workstation menus, enable the Quick Switch view.


Solution

a Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

b In the VMware Workstation menus, select View > Quick Switch to enable
the Quick Switch view (or click the Quickswitch icon on the VMware
Workstation tool bar).

End of Solution

Note: If the Quick Switch icon is not displayed on the tool bar, modify the tool
bar display of VMware Workstation by selecting View > Toolbars. For
this course, display only the View toolbar, and hide the Power, Snapshot,
ACE, and Replay tool bars.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

How is the Quick Switch view different from the default view?

Answer: The workspace is enlarged to fit the screen. The display of


the other virtual machine tabs is included on the screen.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


28 B–24 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
2 Change back to the default view.

Solution
Press F11.
B
If the view does not change, press Ctrl+Alt on the keyboard to release the
keyboard from the virtual machine and press F11 again.
End of Solution

Note: When working through the lab exercises, use the F11 shortcut to toggle
between the default and Quick Switch views, as desired.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


29 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–25
Exercise 4: Running basic commands (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you verify that the virtual machines can communicate using TCP/
IP on the virtual network.

Verifying communications from lnxmaster

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

lnxmaster

2 On lnxmaster, open a Terminal window.

Solution
On the desktop, double-click the Terminal icon.
End of Solution

3 From the command prompt, ping each of the other five virtual machines in
the lab environment using both the fully qualified domain names and the short
names. The domain name is example.com. The names of the remaining
virtual machines are:

– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– vtl.example.com
Solution
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


30 B–26 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
End of Solution

Was a reply received from each of the virtual machines, indicating that the B
lnxmaster master server system can communicate successfully with the
other virtual machines?

Answer: Yes, the output of the ping command shows a reply is


received from each of the virtual machine IP addresses.

Note: If a ping command reports “unknown host” or timeout errors, verify


the command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Note: To reinforce a best practice, fully qualified host names are used for
system names throughout the remainder of the course.

Verifying communications from lnxmedia

1 Access the console of the lnxmedia virtual machine.

lnxmedia

2 On lnxmedia, open a Terminal window.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

On the desktop, double-click the Terminal icon.


End of Solution

3 From the command prompt, ping each of the other five virtual machines in
the lab environment using both the fully qualified domain names and the short
names. The domain name is example.com. The names of the remaining
virtual machines are:

– lnxmaster.example.com
– winclient.example.com
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
31 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–27
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com
– vtl.example.com
Solution

ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
End of Solution

Was a reply received from each of the virtual machines, indicating that the
lnxmedia system can communicate successfully with the other virtual
machines in the lab environment?

Answer: Yes, the output of the ping command shows a reply is


received from each of the virtual machine IP addresses.

Note: To verify network communications from every virtual machine to all other
virtual machines in the lab environment, access a command prompt
window or terminal window on each virtual machine and ping all other
systems, using both their fully qualified and short names. Remember, when
the ping command is issued from a UNIX/Linux system, the pings are
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

sent until the command is manually terminated (use Ctrl+C to terminate the
ping command).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


32 B–28 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 5: Using SSH (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you establish an SSH connection using PuTTY from winserver B
to lnxmaster, lnxmedia, or lnxclient, the Linux-based systems in this
virtual lab environment. An SSH connection may be used when performing
command line operations on the Linux-based client to improve performance of
those operations.

Note: When directed to access the lnxmaster, lnxmedia, or lnxclient


tabs in VMware, as an alternative to clicking on the tabs for these systems
in VMWare Workstation, you can use an SSH connection from the
winserver virtual machine. In some cases, this method of connection
may be preferred for performance reasons.

winserver

1 On the desktop of winserver, use PuTTY to connect to


lnxclient.example.com using SSH and log in as the student user.
– Login: student
– Password: training
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Access the console of the winserver virtual machine.

b Double-click the PuTTY icon.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


33 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–29
c On the PuTTY Configuration screen, under Saved Sessions, select
lnxclient.example.com.

d Click Load.

e Click Open.

f When prompted, log in as the student user:

› Login: student
› Password: training
End of Solution

2 From the remote session into lnxclient, ping winserver by its fully
qualified name (winserver.example.com).

Solution
ping winserver.example.com
End of Solution

Was a reply received from winserver.example.com, indicating that the


lnxclient and winserver systems can communicate successfully using
PuTTY and ping?

Answer: Yes, the output of the ping command shows a reply is


received from the winserver.example.com virtual
machine. PuTTY can be used from
winserver.example.com to access the Linux-based
virtual machines in the lab environment.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Close the PuTTY console window.

End of lab

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


34 B–30 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)


This lab activity provides you with an introduction to the lab delivery environment
used for this course, enabling you to successfully navigate and use the lab systems
provided for the course.
Symantec NetBackup courses may be delivered in a number of settings:
• In a traditional classroom, with physical systems provided for performing lab
activities
• In a virtual classroom, with online access provided to lab systems
Regardless of the setting in which you attend this NetBackup 7.5 Administration
course, the lab environment is provided using virtual lab systems. The lab systems
are deployed using one of two delivery platforms:
• VMware Workstation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• The Hatsize delivery platform


The user interfaces provided in these two lab delivery environments differ. This
lab introduction activity provides you with practice navigating and performing
typical activities related to the use of the virtual machines provided for this course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


35 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–31
Lab environment overview
The labs for this course are performed within a virtual environment consisting of
six virtual machines, as illustrated on the slide. This virtual environment has been
developed specifically for this course and is described in the following sections.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


36 B–32 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Virtual machine configuration


The lab activities for this course use the six virtual machines identified on the slide
and in Table 1. The introductory page of each lab activity identifies the virtual
machines that are used in the lab activity. Icons, such as those shown in the first
column on the slide, are displayed to indicate which virtual machine is used to
perform each of the lab steps.

System Description Fully Qualified Host Name


Name
vtl Virtual tape library with vtl.example.com
two tape drives
lnxmaster NetBackup 7.5 master/ lnxmaster.example.com
EMM/media server
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia NetBackup 7.5 media lnxmedia.example.com


server
winclient NetBackup 7.5 client winclient.example.com
lnxclient NetBackup 7.5 client lnxclient.example.com
winserver OpsCenter 7.5 server and winserver.example.com
NetBackup media server
Table 1: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


37 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–33
Note: In the following exercises, the virtual machines are identified by the system
names listed in Table 1.

Virtual machine account information


Refer to Table 2 for the logon credentials for each of the virtual machines used in
this lab environment. For most lab steps, log on to the virtual machines using the
student user ID. In some cases, the lab instructions may direct you to log on to a
virtual machine as the Administrator or root user.

System name student Logon Administrator Logon


Credentials Credentials
lnxmaster User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxmedia User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winclient User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winserver User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxclient User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
vtl User: root
Password: veritas1
Table 2: Virtual Machine logon credentials

Accessing virtual machines


How and where you attend the NetBackup 7.5 Administration class determines
how you access the virtual machines in the lab environment. Your instructor will
direct you to the appropriate set of lab procedures for the environment you are
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

using in this class.


• If you are working with Hatsize, continue to the Hatsize introduction section
on the following page.
• If you are working with VMware Workstation, in either a physical or virtual
classroom, locate and complete the Lab introduction exercise for VMware
Workstation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


38 B–34 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Hatsize introduction
In this lab activity, you become familiar with the lab environment used in the
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy course, including the
methods used to access the lab systems.
The hands-on portion of this lab activity enables you to perform basic operations
on virtual machines, as shown on the Hatsize introduction slide. Adopting the best
practice guidelines provided in this lab enables you to perform the remaining lab
activities of this course more efficiently.

Note: Only use these exercises if the class is using the hosted Hatsize platform to
access the lab environment. Instructions for VMware Workstation lab
environments are introduced in a separate lab activity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience level:
• Appendix A provides step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete lab instructions and solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


39 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–35
Hatsize lab environment
Table 4 provides a translation of virtual machine system names referred to in the
lab guide to the corresponding system names in the Hatsize interface. Each system
name is prefixed with K#- (number) in Hatsize.

System
Hatsize Name Description
Name
vtl K#-vtl.example.com Virtual tape library with
two tape drive (not visable
in Hatsize)

lnxmaster K#-lnxmaster.example.com NetBackup 7.5 master/


EMM/media server
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia K#-lnxmedia.example.com NetBackup 7.5 media


server
winclient K#-winclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
lnxclient K#-lnxclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
winserver K#-winserver.example.com OpsCenter 7.5 server
and NetBackup media
server
Table 3: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


40 B–36 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Hatsize interface
The screen shot on the slide shows the Hatsize interface used to access the virtual
machines included in your lab environment. Instead of using tabs, such as the tabs
displayed in the VMware Workstation user interface, you access Hatsize virtual
machines from the Operations and Window menus. Other key interface elements
include:
• Title Bar: Indicates the currently connected machine and whether you have
control of the machine or are in view-only mode
• Operations: Is used to make the initial connection to virtual machines (other
than the VM that is designated as the Primary VM)
• Window: Is used to switch between active virtual machines, after the initial
connection has been made to the VMs
• System Control: Is used to start, stop, and restart virtual machines
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Time Remaining: Indicates the time remaining in the session

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


41 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–37
Exercise 1: Connecting to the lab environment (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you log on to Hatsize. For each lab environment in Hatsize, a
specific virtual machine is marked as the primary machine. All other machines are
marked as secondary machines. When you connect to the Hatsize interface, you
are initially and automatically connected to the primary machine. In this lab
environment, the primary machine is the virtual machine, lnxmaster.

1 Locate the Hatsize portal URL and login credentials from your registration e-
mail. Record your credentials here:

Hatsize user name:

Hatsize password:

2 In Internet Explorer, open the Hatsize portal URL and log on with your
assigned user name and password.

Solution
The logon screen in the browser is similar to this:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

3 After logging in, find your class in the Current Classes table and click Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


42 B–38 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Sample:

4 In the Agenda for your class, find the Day 1 lab session and click OPEN.

Note: All lab sessions listed for your course are identical. You can connect to
your lab environment using any of the Lab entries listed for the course.

5 Confirm that you see the primary machine connecting. For this course, the
primary machine is lnxmaster.

6 Wait for the first console window to open. This console window is for the
virtual machine designated as the primary machine for this lab environment.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


43 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–39
The console that is displayed is similar to this screen shot.

lnxmaster

7 Click in the console window and log on to lnxmaster using the following
credentials:

User name student


Password training
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


44 B–40 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 2: Connecting to additional virtual machines (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you connect to additional virtual machines to become familiar B


with switching between systems.

lnxmaster

1 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,


lnxmedia.
Solution

Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-lnxmedia.


End of Solution

lnxmedia

2 Click in the console window of the lnxmedia system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student


Password training

3 Use the Window menu to switch back to lnxmaster.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution
Select Window > K#-lnxmaster.
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


45 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–41
Note: If you have not yet connected to one of the secondary machines, you are
unable to use the Window menu to switch to the console of that machine.
You must first use the Operations menu to perform a “Connect to
Secondary” operation to make the initial connection the virtual machine.

lnxmaster

4 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,


winclient.

Solution
Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-winclient.
End of Solution

winclient

5 Use the Operations menu to send a Ctrl-Alt-Del to the virtual machine.

Solution
Select Operations > Send Ctrl-Alt-Del.
End of Solution

6 Click in the console window of the winclient system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

User name student


Password training

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


46 B–42 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,
lnxclient.

Solution
B
Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-lnxclient.
End of Solution

lnxclient

8 Click in the console window of the lnxclient system and log in to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student


Password training

9 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,


winserver.

Solution
Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-winserver.
End of Solution

winserver

10 Use the Operations menu to send a Ctrl-Alt-Del to the virtual machine.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution
Select Operations > Send Ctrl-Alt-Del.
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


47 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–43
11 Click in the console window of the winserver system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student


Password training

12 Use the Window menu to switch back to the lnxmaster virtual machine.

Solution
Select Window > K#-lnxmaster.
End of Solution

Note: In general, there is no need to log into the vtl virtual machine in your lab
environment. Only log into the vtl virtual machine at the direction of
your instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


48 B–44 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 3: Running basic commands (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you verify that the virtual machines can communicate using TCP/ B
IP on the virtual network.

System Name Fully Qualified Host Name


vtl vtl.example.com
lnxmaster lnxmaster.example.com
lnxmedia lnxmedia.example.com
winclient winclient.example.com
lnxclient lnxclient.example.com
winserver winserver.example.com

Verifying communications from lnxmaster

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

lnxmaster

2 On lnxmaster, open a Terminal window.

Solution
On the desktop, double-click the Terminal icon.
End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 From the command prompt, ping lnxmedia, using its fully qualified host
name.

Solution
ping lnxmedia.example.com
End of Solution

Was a reply received to the ping command, indicating that the lnxmaster
and lnxmedia systems are able to communicate using the fully qualified host
name?
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
49 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–45
Answer: Yes, the command output displays a reply is received
from the lnxmedia IP address.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

4 From the command prompt, ping lnxmedia using its short name
(lnxmedia).

Solution
ping lnxmedia
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that lnxmaster and lnxmedia systems


are able to communicate using the short host name?

Answer: Yes, the command output displays a reply is received


from the lnxmedia IP address.

Note: To reinforce a best practice, fully qualified host names are used for
system names throughout the remainder of the course.

5 From the command prompt of lnxmaster, ping each of the remaining


virtual machines in your lab environment, to verify the TCP/IP
communications with each system. Ping each system using both the short and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

fully-qualified names. The names of the remaining virtual machines are:

– vtl.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Solution
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
50 B–46 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
B
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate


successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply


received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from lnxmedia

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of lnxmedia.


Solution

Select Window > K#-lnxmedia.


End of Solution

lnxmedia
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Open a Terminal window and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– vtl.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


51 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–47
Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate


successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply


received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from winclient

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of winclient.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

Select Window > K#-winclient.


End of Solution

winclient

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


52 B–48 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
2 Open a command prompt and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com B
– vtl.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate


successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply


received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from lnxclient

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of lnxclient.


Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


53 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–49
Select Window > K#-lnxclient.
End of Solution

lnxclient

2 Open a Terminal window and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate


successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

received from the IP address of the system that is


pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


54 B–50 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Verifying communications from winserver

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of winserver.


Solution B

Select Window > K#-winserver.


End of Solution

winserver

2 Open a command prompt and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– vtl.example.com

Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are communicating successfully?

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


55 Lab 1: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–51
Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply
received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Note: In general, you do not need to log in to the vtl virtual machine in your lab
environment. If TCP/IP communications with the vtl virtual machine
indicate a potential issue, notify your instructor.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


56 B–52 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Lab 2: Installing NetBackup


In this lab, you perform tasks to verify the NetBackup 7.5 environment provided
for this course. The slide describes the tasks to be performed, including:
• Verifying the RedHat Linux-based NetBackup master server installation
• Verifying the RedHat Linux-based NetBackup media server installation
• Verifying the Windows-based NetBackup client installation
• Verifying the RedHat Linux-based NetBackup client installation
• Using NetBackup commands to view, stop, and start the NetBackup services
and processes
NetBackup 7.5 software has been pre-installed on systems in this lab environment,
as follows:
• lnxmaster - NetBackup 7.5 server and client software
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• lnxmedia - NetBackup 7.5 server and client software


• winclient- NetBackup 7.5 client software
• lnxclient - NetBackup 7.5 client software
• winserver - NetBackup 7.5 server and client software, and OpsCenter 7.5
server software
Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


57 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–53
Power on the virtual machines in your lab environment

Note: In some Symantec lab environments the virtual machines are started
automatically. If the virtual machines in your lab environment are already
powered on, proceed to Exercise 1.

It is imperative that the virtual machines in your lab environment are started in the
proper sequence, as indicated in Table 1.

Startup Virtual Machine Name Description


order
1 vtl.example.com Virtual tape library with two
tape drives
2 lnxmaster.example.com NetBackup 7.5 master/
EMM/media server
3 lnxmedia.example.com NetBackup 7.5 media server

4 winclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client


5 lnxclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
6 winserver.example.com OpsCenter 7.5 server and
NetBackup media server
Table 1: Virtual machine startup sequence

Note: In the Hatsize lab environment all the virtual machines are started in the
correct order. The VTL is not visible by default.

1 If your virtual machines are not currently powered on, start them now in the
following order: vtl.example.com, lnxmaster.example.com,
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia.example.com, winclient.example.com,
lnxclient.example.com, and winserver.example.com.
Ensure each machine is completely powered on before starting the next
machine.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


58 B–54 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
2 Verify that all virtual machines in your lab environment are started before
continuing.

Solution

a Access the console of each virtual machine in your lab environment, one at
a time.

b Verify that a logon prompt is displayed on the console of each virtual


machine. B

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


59 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–55
Exercise 1: Verifying the Linux-based 7.5 master server
installation

In this exercise, you perform steps to verify a successful installation of a


NetBackup 7.5 master server. To accomplish this you:
• Navigate to the NetBackup installation directories, and observe the structure
and content of these directories.
• Verify that important NetBackup directory paths have been added to the PATH
environment variable on the master server system.
• Verify the NetBackup license key or keys that are installed on the master server
and add a new license key if the current key is expired.
• View, stop, and start the NetBackup daemons and processes that are running on
a Linux-based master server.

System Student Logon Administrator Logon


Credentials Credentials
lnxmaster User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
lnxmedia User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
lnxclient User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
winclient User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winserver User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
vtl Not applicable - do not log User: root
on to this system unless Password: veritas1
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

directed by your instructor


Table 2: Virtual Machine login credentials

1 Access the system console of your master server,


lnxmaster.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


60 B–56 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Viewing NetBackup master server directory contents
In the steps that follow, you locate key NetBackup installation directories and view
the contents of these directories. In addition, you view the Windows PATH
environment variable settings, to verify that important NetBackup directories are
included in the PATH.

lnxmaster
B

2 Log on to the lnxmaster system as student.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server and select
Open.

4 Change directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup directory.

Solution
cd /usr/openv/netbackup
End of Solution

5 List the directory contents and note the directories that reside in the /usr/
openv/netbackup directory, including the bin, client, db, and logs
directories.

Solution
ls -la
End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 Locate the version file, and view the contents of the file.

Solution
cat version
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


61 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–57
7 Record the NetBackup version number indicated by the contents of the
version file.

NetBackup version: VERSION NetBackup 7.5

8 Locate the bp.conf file, and view the contents of the file.

Solution
cat bp.conf
End of Solution

9 Record the information found in the bp.conf file.

First SERVER entry: lnxmaster.example.com


Second SERVER entry: lnxmedia.example.com
Third SERVER entry: winserver.example.com
OPS_CENTER_SERVER_NAME: winserver.example.com

10 Change directory to the bin directory (/usr/openv/netbackup/bin).

Solution
cd bin
End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 List the contents of the bin directory, and note the following files and
directories that reside in /usr/openv/netbackup/bin, including:

– admincmd
– goodies
– support
– bpps
– jbpSA (symbolic link)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


62 B–58 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
– jnbSA (symbolic link)
Solution

a ls -la |more

b Press the spacebar to advance to each page of the directory contents until
the command prompt is returned.

End of Solution
B

12 Change directory to the admincmd directory (/usr/openv/netbackup/


bin/admincmd). Locate the file: get_license_key.

Solution

a cd admincmd

b ls -la |more

End of Solution

13 Change directory to the goodies directory (/usr/openv/netbackup/


bin/goodies).

Solution
cd ../goodies
End of Solution

14 Briefly view the contents of the goodies directory. Locate the following
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

files:

– available_media
– netbackup
Solution
ls -la |more
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


63 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–59
15 Change directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support
directory. Locate the following files:

– nbcplogs
– nbsu
– nbdna
Solution

a cd ../support

b ls -la |more

End of Solution

16 Change directory to the /usr/openv/volmgr/bin directory.

Solution
cd /usr/openv/volmgr/bin
End of Solution

17 Locate the following file in the /usr/openv/volmgr/bin directory:


robtest.

Solution
ls -la |more
End of Solution

18 Execute the command: echo $PATH.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

19 Verify the following NetBackup directories are listed in the path.

– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin
– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd
– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/goodies
– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support
– /usr/openv/volmgr/bin

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


64 B–60 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: Additional NetBackup paths may be included in the PATH environment
variable as needed, depending upon whether optional NetBackup-related
software is installed on the system. An example of this optional software is
the OpsCenter Server.

Verifying the NetBackup license keys


In the steps that follow, you add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation extension
B
license key on the master server. This extends the expired evaluation license key.

Note: A NetBackup evaluation license key is used for purposes of this course.
This license key enables all NetBackup functionality for a limited time.
When this course is run, the evaluation license key that was installed at the
time of the course release has expired. A new, valid license key MUST be
installed before NetBackup can be used.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open Terminal window on your master server system,


lnxmaster.

2 To become superuser, type su - root, and press Enter. Type training


for the password.

3 Type the command: get_license_key, and press Enter.

4 When the menu is displayed, type L, and press enter to List Registered
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

License Keys.

5 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmaster.example.com

6 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


65 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–61
Host: lnxmaster.example.com
Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server
Expires (date): April 24, 2012 at 01:00:00

7 Is the NetBackup license key still valid, or has it expired?

Answer:
It is expected that the license key has expired.

8 If the NetBackup license key on your master server has expired, perform the
following steps to add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation license key.

Note: If the license key on your master server is valid, review the following steps
for adding a license key to the master server system.

9 Contact your instructor to obtain a valid NetBackup license key. Record the
new license key in the space provided:

NetBackup license key:

10 In the menu, type A (Add a License Key), and press Enter.

11 When prompted to Enter license key, type the license key provided by your
instructor, and press Enter.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

12 Note the results of the adding the license key.

Note: You must be superuser to enter a license key. You can list license keys
using the get_license_key utility without superuser privileges.

13 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press Enter to List Active License
Keys.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


66 B–62 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
14 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmaster.example.com

15 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the information in the table.

Host: lnxmaster.example.com
Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server B
Expires (date):

16 Type q, and press Enter, to Quit License Key Utility.

Viewing, stopping, and starting processes on a NetBackup server


In the following steps, you use NetBackup commands to view, stop, and start the
NetBackup processes on the master server system.

CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup


daemons and processes because that operation disrupts backup
and restore activity that is in progress at the time that the
operation is performed.

1 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

2 Note the list of processes that is displayed in the command output.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: You must be superuser to run the bpps, netbackup stop and,
netbackup start, commands.

3 At the command prompt, type netbackup stop, and press Enter to stop all
running NetBackup processes.

The command takes a few moments to complete.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


67 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–63
4 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

5 Note that no NetBackup processes are displayed in the command output.

6 At the command prompt, type netbackup start, and press Enter, to start
the NetBackup processes.

7 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

8 Note the long list of processes that is displayed in the command output. Now
that there is a valid license key many more processes are able to run.

9 At the command prompt, type exit, and press Enter, to exit superuser.

10 Close the Terminal window on the master server system.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


68 B–64 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 2: Verifying the Linux-based 7.5 media server installation

In this exercise you verify the installation of the NetBackup 7.5 media server
software on a RedHat Linux-based system. To accomplish this you:
• Navigate to and observe the structure and contents of the NetBackup
installation directories on a Linux-based media server.
• Verify that important NetBackup directory paths have been added to the PATH
environment variable on the media server system. B
• View and verify the NetBackup license keys on the media server system.
• View the NetBackup daemons and processes that are running on a Linux-based
media server.

Viewing NetBackup media server installation directories


In the steps that follow, you locate key NetBackup installation directories and view
the contents of these directories on a Linux-based NetBackup media server system.
In addition, you view the PATH environment variable settings to verify that
important NetBackup directories are included in the path.

Note: The NetBackup software installed and the default installation directories
on UNIX and Linux-based media servers are identical to the NetBackup
software installed and default installation directories on a master server
system that is running on the same UNIX or Linux-based operating system
platform. The difference between the two is found in the roles that are
configured for the systems. Because of the unique roles assigned to each
type of system, the services that are running on these systems differ
substantially.

Viewing NetBackup media server directory contents


In the steps that follow, you locate key NetBackup installation directories and view
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the contents of these directories. In addition, you view the PATH environment
variable settings, to verify that important NetBackup directories are included in the
PATH.

lnxmedia

1 Log on to the lnxmedia system as student.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


69 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–65
2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server and select
Open.

3 Change directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup directory.

Solution
cd /usr/openv/netbackup
End of Solution

4 List the directory contents and note the directories that reside in the /usr/
openv/netbackup directory, including the bin, client, db, and logs
directories.

Solution
ls -la
End of Solution

5 Locate the version file, and view the contents of the file.

Solution
cat version
End of Solution

6 Record the NetBackup version number indicated by the contents of the


version file.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

NetBackup version: VERSION NetBackup 7.5

7 Locate the bp.conf file, and view the contents of the file.

Solution
cat bp.conf
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


70 B–66 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
8 Record the information found in the bp.conf file.

First SERVER entry: lnxmaster.example.com

Second SERVER entry: lnxmedia.example.com

9 Change directory to the bin directory (/usr/openv/netbackup/bin).

Solution B

cd bin
End of Solution

10 List the contents of the bin directory, and note the following files and
directories that reside in /usr/openv/netbackup/bin, including:

– admincmd
– goodies
– support
– bpps
– jbpSA (symbolic link)
– jnbSA (symbolic link)
Solution

a ls -la |more

b Press the spacebar to advance to each page of the directory contents until
the command prompt is returned.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Change directory to the admincmd directory (/usr/openv/netbackup/


bin/admincmd). Locate type file: get_license_key.

Solution

a cd admincmd

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


71 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–67
b ls -la |more

End of Solution

12 Change directory to the goodies directory (/usr/openv/netbackup/


bin/goodies).

Solution
cd ../goodies
End of Solution

13 Briefly view the contents of the goodies directory. Locate the following
files:

– available_media
– netbackup
Solution
ls -la |more
End of Solution

14 Change directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support


directory. Locate the following files:

– nbcplogs
– nbsu
– nbdna
Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a cd ../support

b ls -la |more

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


72 B–68 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
15 Change directory to the /usr/openv/volmgr/bin directory.

Solution
cd /usr/openv/volmgr/bin
End of Solution

16 Locate the following file in the /usr/openv/volmgr/bin directory:


robtest.
B

Solution

a ls -la |more

End of Solution

17 Execute the command: echo $PATH.

18 Verify the following NetBackup directories are listed in the path.

– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin
– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd
– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/goodies
– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support
– /usr/openv/volmgr/bin

Note: Additional NetBackup paths may be included in the PATH environment


variable as needed, depending upon whether optional NetBackup-related
software is installed on the system. An example of this optional software is
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the OpsCenter Server.

Verifying the NetBackup license keys


In the steps that follow, you add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation extension
license key on the master server. This extends the expired evaluation license key.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


73 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–69
Note: A NetBackup evaluation license key is used for purposes of this course.
This license key enables all NetBackup functionality for a limited time.
When this course is run, the evaluation license key that was installed at the
time of the course release has expired. A new, valid license key MUST be
installed before NetBackup can be used.

lnxmedia

1 Access the open Terminal window on your media server system, lnxmedia.

2 To become superuser, type su - root, and press Enter. Type training


for the password.

3 Type the command: get_license_key, and press Enter.

4 When the menu is displayed, type L, and press enter to List Registered
License Keys.

5 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmedia.example.com

6 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the

Host: lnxmedia.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server


Expires (date): April 24, 2012 at 01:00:00

7 Is the NetBackup license key still valid, or has it expired?

Answer:
It is expected that the license key has expired.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


74 B–70 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
8 If the NetBackup license key on your media server has expired, perform the
following steps to add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation license key.

Note: If the license key on your media server is valid, review the following steps
for adding a license key to the master server system.

9 Use the NetBackup evaluation license extension key that was given to you by
your instructor for the master server. Record the license key in the space
provided: B

NetBackup license key:

10 In the menu, type A (Add a License Key), and press Enter.

11 When prompted to Enter license key, type the license key provided by your
instructor, and press Enter.

12 Note the results of the adding the license key.

Note: You must be superuser to enter a license key. You can list license keys
using the get_license_key utility without superuser privileges.

13 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press Enter to List Active License
Keys.

14 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmedia.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

15 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the information in the table.

Host: lnxmedia.example.com
Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server
Expires (date):

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


75 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–71
16 Type q, and press Enter, to Quit License Key Utility.

Viewing, stopping, and starting processes on a NetBackup server


In the following steps, you use NetBackup commands to view, stop, and start the
NetBackup processes on the media server system.

CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup


daemons and processes because that operation disrupts backup
and restore activity that is in progress at the time that the
operation is performed.

1 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

2 Note the processes that are displayed in the command output.

Note: You must be superuser to run the bpps, netbackup stop and,
netbackup start, commands.

3 At the command prompt, type netbackup stop, and press Enter.

The command takes a few moments to complete.

4 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Note that no NetBackup processes are displayed in the command output.

6 At the command prompt, type netbackup start, and press Enter, to start
the NetBackup processes.

7 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


76 B–72 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
8 Note the processes that are displayed in the command output.

Far fewer daemons and processes are running on the media server than on the
master server, especially during periods of low backup and restore activity.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


77 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–73
Exercise 3: Verifying the Linux-based 7.5 client installation

In this exercise you verify the installation of the NetBackup 7.5 client software on
a RedHat Linux-based system. To accomplish this you:
• Navigate to and observe the structure and contents of the NetBackup
installation directories on a Linux-based client.
• Verify that important NetBackup directory paths have been added to the PATH
environment variable on the Linux client system.
• View the NetBackup services that are running on a Linux-based client.

1 Access the system console of your RedHat Linux-based client system,


lnxclient.

lnxclient

2 Log in to the lnxclient system as student.

3 Select System > About this Computer, to open a System Monitor window
and view information about the client system.

4 Close the System Monitor window.

5 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the system and select Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 Change the directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup directory.

Solution
cd /usr/openv/netbackup
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


78 B–74 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Use the ls command to list the contents of the netbackup directory.

Solution
ls -la
(You can also use ls -la /usr/openv/netbackup
or, ls -la)
End of Solution

B
8 Note the bin and logs directories, located in the netbackup directory.

9 View the contents of the bp.conf file.

Solution
cat bp.conf
End of Solution

10 Record the contents of the top line of the bp.conf file.

Top line of bp.conf file: SERVER = lnxmaster.example.com


This entry identifies the host name of the master server from the
perspective of this NetBackup client system.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Change the directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup/bin directory.

Solution
cd bin
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


79 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–75
12 Use the ls command to list the contents of the bin directory.

Solution
ls -la
End of Solution

13 Note files present in the bin directory, including:

– bpps
– bpbackup
– bprestore
– jbpSA
– bp.kill_all
– bp.start_all
– version.

14 View and record the NetBackup version number indicated by the contents of
the version file.

Solution
cat version
End of Solution

NetBackup client version: NetBackup-RedHat2.6.18 7.5

15 Check the PATH environment variable settings on the lnxclient system to


verify that the entries for key NetBackup client directories are included.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin
– /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support
Solution

a In a terminal window on the client system, type echo $PATH, and press
Enter.

b Note the output of the echo $PATH command.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


80 B–76 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
c Verify that the NetBackup directories listed are included in the PATH entry
for the client. Directory entries in the Path are separated by colons. B

End of Solution

Viewing the NetBackup client services on a Linux-based client


In the steps that follow, you view the NetBackup daemons and processes that are
running on an operational Linux-based NetBackup client system.

1 At the command prompt, execute the bpps -a command and note the results.
Solution
Type bpps -a and press Enter.
End of Solution

A “permission denied” message is displayed as a result of the bpps command.

Note: You must be superuser to run the bpps, bp.kill_all and,


bp.start_all, commands.

2 Execute the bpps -a command as super user, and note the results.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Type su - root, and press Enter.

b When prompted for the password, enter the root password (training)
and press Enter.

c Type bpps -a and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


81 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–77
d Note the results of the bpps -a command.

End of Solution

Note: Observe that a small number of NetBackup services and processes are
listed in the output of the bpps command. In general, the majority of
NetBackup client processes are started as needed, during backup and
restore operations, and remain running only while the operations are in
progress.

3 Execute the bp.kill_all command, to stop the NetBackup daemons and


processes on the client system, and note the results.

Solution

a In the terminal window, type bp.kill_all and press Enter.

b Note the results of the command.

End of Solution

The bp.kill_all command looks for NetBackup processes that need to be


terminated, and then lists the processes that it stops.

4 Execute the bpps command and note the results.

Solution
No NetBackup processes are running after the execution of the
bp.kill_all command.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

5 Execute the bp.start_all command as superuser to start the NetBackup


daemons and processes on the client system, and note the results.

Solution

a In the terminal window, type bp.start_all and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


82 B–78 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
b Note the results of the command.

End of Solution

The bp.start_all command looks for NetBackup processes that need to


be started, and then lists the processes as it starts them.

6 Execute the bpps -a command and note the results.


B
7 In the terminal window, type exit, and then press Enter to exit superuser.

8 Close the terminal window on the client system.

Note: The bpps, bp.kill_all, and bp.start_all commands can be used


on any UNIX/Linux-based NetBackup server or client to view, stop, and
start the NetBackup daemons and processes on that system.

CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup daemons


and processes because that operation disrupts backup and restore
operations that are in progress at the time that the operation is
performed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


83 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–79
Exercise 4: Verifying the Windows-based 7.5 client installation

In this exercise you verify the installation of the NetBackup 7.5 client software on
a Windows-based system. To accomplish this you:
• Navigate to and observe the structure and contents of the NetBackup
installation directories on a Windows-based client.
• Verify that important NetBackup directory paths have been added to the PATH
environment variable on the client system.
• View the NetBackup services that are running on a Windows-based client.

Viewing Windows-based NetBackup client directory contents


In the steps that follow, you locate key NetBackup installation directories and view
the contents of these directories. In addition, you view the Windows PATH
environment variable settings to verify that important NetBackup directories are
included in the path.

1 Access the system console of your Windows-based client system,


winclient.

winclient

2 Log on to the winclient system as student.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop and select Open.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Navigate to the following directories on the NetBackup client system. Note the
contents of these directories.

– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup.
– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin
– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\support

5 In the C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup directory, locate the


version.txt file and open the file in Notepad.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


84 B–80 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
6 Record the NetBackup version number indicated by the contents of the
version.txt file.

NetBackup version: VERSION NetBackup 7.5

7 Close the version.txt file and exit Notepad.

8 Close the Computer window. B

9 Check the PATH environment variable settings on the winclient system to


verify that the entries for key NetBackup client directories are included.

– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin
– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\support
Solution

a In a Command Prompt window on the client system, type PATH and


press Enter.

b Note the output of the PATH command.

c Verify that the NetBackup directories are included in the PATH entry.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Directory entries in the path are separated by semicolons.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


85 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–81
Note: You can also access the Windows PATH setting by navigating to
Computer > Properties > Advanced System Settings. On the Advanced
tab of the System Properties window, click Environment Variables. In
the Environment Variables dialog box, locate the PATH entry in the list
of System Variables.

Viewing the NetBackup client services


In the steps that follow, you view the NetBackup services that are running on an
operational Windows-based NetBackup client system.

1 From a Command Prompt window on your Windows-based NetBackup


client, winclient.

2 Execute the bpps command and note the results.

Solution
Type the bpps command and press Enter.
End of Solution

Note: Observe that a small number of NetBackup services and processes are
listed in the output of the bpps command. In general, the majority of
NetBackup client processes are started as needed, during backup and
restore operations, and remain running only while the operations are in
progress.

3 Close the Command Prompt window.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Run the Windows Services Manager on winclient, to view the


NetBackup-related services.

Solution

a Right-click the Computer icon on the Windows desktop and select


Manage.

b When the Server Manager window is displayed, expand Configuration in


the left pane of the window.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
86 B–82 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
c Under Configuration, click Services.

Note: You can also start the Windows Services manager by selecting Start > Run
> services.msc.

End of Solution

5 When the Services pane is displayed in the right pane of the Server Manager, B
scroll down to locate the NetBackup services.

The NetBackup Bare Metal Restore Boot Server service is the first in a short
list of NetBackup services that are displayed.

6 Alter the display of the columns in the Services pane as necessary, so that you
can see the descriptions and status of the services.

7 Note that only a small number of the NetBackup services that are listed have a
status of Started. This is normal and no cause for alarm.

8 Scroll further down the list of services, and note that one Symantec service is
listed.

9 Record the name of the Symantec service that is listed.

Symantec service name: NetBackup relies on the Symantec Private Branch


Exchange service. This service must be running to enable successful
NetBackup communications.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Close the Server Manager window.

Note: The bpps.exe, bpdown.exe, and bpup.exe commands can be used


on any Windows-based NetBackup server or client to view, stop, and start
the NetBackup services on that system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


87 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–83
CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup services,
because that operation disrupts backup and restore operations that
are in progress at the time that the operation is performed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


88 B–84 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 5: Verifying a Windows-based media server installation

Viewing Windows-based media server installation directories


In the steps that follow, you locate key NetBackup installation directories and view
the contents of these directories on a Windows-based NetBackup media server
system. In addition, you view the Windows PATH environment variable settings to
verify that important NetBackup directories are included in the path.

B
Note: The NetBackup software installed and the default installation directories
on Windows-based media servers are identical to the NetBackup software
installed and default installation directories on a Windows-based master
server system. The difference between the two is found in the roles that are
configured for the systems. Because of the unique roles assigned to each
type of system, the services that are running on these systems differ
substantially.

1 Access the system console of your Windows-based media server,


winserver.

winserver

2 Log on to the winserver system as student.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop and select Open.

4 Navigate to C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 In the C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup directory, locate the


version.txt file, and open the file in Notepad.

6 Record the NetBackup version number indicated by the contents of the


version.txt file.

NetBackup version: VERSION NetBackup 7.5

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


89 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–85
7 Close the version.txt file and exit Notepad.

8 Navigate to the bin directory (C:\Program


Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin).

9 Note the directories that reside in C:\Program


Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin, including the admincmd,
goodies, and support directories.

10 Briefly view the contents of the bin directory and locate the following files:
bpps.exe, bpdown.exe, and bpup.exe.

11 Select the Computer window, and navigate to the admincmd directory


(C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\admincmd).

12 Briefly view the contents of the admincmd directory.

13 In the Computer window, navigate to the goodies directory (C:\Program


Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\goodies).

14 Briefly view the contents of the goodies directory.

15 In the Computer window, navigate to the C:\Program


Files\Veritas\Volmgr\bin directory.

16 Briefly view the contents of the C:\Program


Files\Veritas\Volmgr\bin directory.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

17 Close the Computer window.

18 Access the desktop of the media server, winserver.

19 Check the PATH environment variable settings on the winserver system to


verify that the entries for key NetBackup directories are included.

– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin
– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\admincmd
– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\goodies
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
90 B–86 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
– C:\Program Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\support
– C:\Program Files\Veritas\Volmgr\bin

Solution

a In a Command Prompt window on the media server system, type PATH


and press Enter.

b Note the output of the PATH command.

c Verify that the NetBackup directories are included in the PATH entry.
Directory entries in the path are separated by semicolons.

End of Solution

Note: Additional NetBackup paths may be included in the Window’s PATH


environment variable as needed, depending on whether optional
NetBackup-related software is installed on the system. An example of this
optional software is the OpsCenter Server.

Note: You can also access the Windows PATH setting by navigating to
Computer > Properties > Advanced System Settings. On the Advanced
tab of the System Properties window, click Environment Variables. In
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the Environment Variables dialog box, locate the Path entry in the list of
System Variables.

Verifying the NetBackup media server license keys


In the steps that follow, you verify the NetBackup license key on the winserver
system, to determine if the license key is valid. If necessary, add a new evaluation
license key.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


91 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–87
Note: A NetBackup evaluation license key is used on all NetBackup servers in
the lab environment for this course. This license key enables all NetBackup
functionality for a limited time period. It is possible that the evaluation
license key that was installed at the time of the course release has expired.
If this is the case, a new, valid license key must be installed before
NetBackup can be used on the media server system.

1 Access the console of your media server system, winserver.

winserver

2 Right-click on the NetBackup Administration Console and select Open.

Note: When opening the NetBackup Administration Console on a media server


it automatically connects to the master server. To use the Administration
Console of the media server to implement a new license key, you must first
connect the Administration Console to the media server system.

3 Use the Change Server icon, from the NetBackup Administration Console,
to point the console to the media server, winserver.
Solution

a From the NetBackup Administration Console, click the Change Server


icon. The Change Server dialog box opens.

b Type winserver, in the Enter host name text box and press Enter.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Select Help > License Keys in the NetBackup Administration Console.

5 Click the icon to add a new license key.

6 Using the same license key provided by your instructor for lnxmaster and
lnxmedia, type the key in the Add a new License Key dialog box, and click
Add.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


92 B–88 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Click the entry for the top feature that is listed in the NetBackup License Keys
window, and then click the Properties button.

8 Verify that the new key is valid, and that the Expiration of the key does not
occur until after the completion date of this class.

9 Click Close, to close the Properties window.

B
10 Click Close, to close the NetBackup License Keys window.

11 Close the NetBackup Administration Console (File > Exit)

Stopping and starting the NetBackup services

1 In a Command Prompt window, type bpdown and press Enter.

2 When prompted “Do you wish to proceed?”, type y.

NetBackup proceeds with the shutdown of the NetBackup services and


processes on the media server system.
Within a few moments, the shutdown of the services and processes completes,
and you are returned to the command prompt.

3 In the Command Prompt window, type bpup and press Enter.

4 When prompted “Do you wish to proceed?”, type y.

NetBackup proceeds with the startup of the NetBackup services.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Within a few moments, the startup of the services completes, and you are
returned to the command prompt.

Note: When a NetBackup license key has expired, after a new key is entered, it is
necessary to stop and restart the NetBackup services.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


93 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–89
Viewing the NetBackup services on a Windows-based media server
In the steps that follow, you view the NetBackup services that are running on an
operational Windows-based NetBackup media server.

1 In a Command Prompt window on your media server, winserver.

2 Execute the bpps command, and note the results.

Solution
Type the bpps command and press Enter.
End of Solution

Note: Observe that a number of NetBackup services and processes are listed in
the output of the bpps command. The specific processes that are running
on a NetBackup media server vary depending on the NetBackup features
that are licensed and configured for use on the media server, and the level
of backup and restore activity that is currently occurring. In general, there
are far fewer processes running on the media server than on the master
server. For now, do not be concerned about the specific services and
processes that are running on your media server system.

3 Close the Command Prompt window.

4 Run the Windows Services Manager on winserver, to view the


NetBackup-related services.

Solution

a Right-click the Computer icon on the Windows desktop.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b In the menu, click Manage.

c When the Server Manager is displayed, in the left pane expand


Configuration.

d Under Configuration, click Services.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


94 B–90 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: You can also start the Windows Services Manager by selecting Start >
Run > services.msc.

End of Solution

5 When the Services pane is displayed in the right pane of the Server Manager,
scroll down to locate the NetBackup services.
B
The NetBackup Authentication service is the first of a long list of NetBackup
services that are listed.

6 Alter the display of the columns in the Services pane as necessary so that you
can see the descriptions and status of the services.

7 Note the long list of services that are associated with NetBackup. Note also
that many of these services are not started.

Note: Many of the NetBackup services listed are not started. This is normal and
depends on the NetBackup features or options that are licensed and
configured. On a NetBackup media server, the list of services that are
started is much shorter than on a master server.

8 Scroll further down the list of services, and note that one or more Symantec
services are listed.

9 Record the name of one Symantec service that is listed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Symantec service name: NetBackup relies on the Symantec Private Branch


Exchange service. This service must be running to enable successful
NetBackup communications.

10 Close the Server Manager window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


95 Lab 2: Installing NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–91
Note: The bpps.exe, bpdown.exe, and bpup.exe commands can be used
on any Windows-based NetBackup server or client to view, stop, and start
the NetBackup services on that system.

CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup services,


because that operation disrupts backup and restore operations that
are in progress at the time that the operation is performed.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


96 B–92 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces


In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson.
This lab provides practice using the NetBackup administrative and user interfaces,
specifically to include:
• Accessing and exploring the NetBackup Administration Console
• Accessing and exploring the OpsCenter user Web interface
• Accessing and exploring the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore
graphical user interface

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


97 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–93
Exercise 1: Exploring the NetBackup Administration Console

In this exercise you use the NetBackup Administration Console to become


familiar with its layout and with the capabilities provided by this most commonly
used NetBackup user interface.

1 Access the console of your master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Right-click the Terminal icon located on the desktop of your master server
system and select Open.

Note: A Terminal window may remain open from the previous lab activity. If a
Terminal window is open from a previous activity, close that window and
open a new Terminal window.

3 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

4 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User


name (password = training).

5 The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 Note the top entry in the object tree displayed in the left pane of the
Administration Console. Record the host name that is displayed.

Host name: lnxmaster.example.com or lnxmaster

7 In the left pane of the Administration Console, collapse all top-level branches
that are expanded so that only the top-level branches are displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


98 B–94 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The top-level objects in the NetBackup Administration Console object tree
are:
– Backup, Archive, and Restore
– Activity Monitor
– NetBackup Management
– Media and Device Management
– Access Management
– Vault Management
– Bare Metal Restore Management

8 Click the host name of the master server displayed at the top of the left pane.

9 Note the NetBackup wizard names that are displayed in the right pane (the
B
details pane) of the Administration Console.

How many NetBackup wizards are provided?

Number of NetBackup wizards: nine (9) wizards are provided

Solution
Nine (9) wizards are provided:
– Getting Started
– Configure Storage Devices
– Configure Disk Storage Servers
– Configure Cloud Storage Servers
– Configure Disk Pool
– Configure Volumes
– Configure the Catalog Backup
– Create a Policy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Recover the Catalog


End of Solution

10 Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

11 Note the three tabs displayed at the bottom of the right pane of the Activity
Monitor display (in the right pane). Record the names of these tabs in the table.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


99 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–95
1st tab Jobs
2nd tab Daemons
3rd tab Processes

12 Briefly view the contents of each of the tabs available in the right pane of the
Activity Monitor.

– The Jobs tab is used to display entries for all NetBackup jobs and job
types. There are currently no jobs displayed.
– The Daemons tab lists the daemons that are running or potentially running
on all of the configured NetBackup servers (master and media servers) in
the master server domain. It is normal that some NetBackup daemons are
Stopped. This is no cause for concern at this time.
– The Processes tab lists the NetBackup processes that are running on the
master server system.

13 Click the symbol to the left of NetBackup Management in the left pane of the
Administration Console, to expand the NetBackup Management object.

14 List the five utilities that are displayed under the expanded NetBackup
Management branch of the object tree.

1st NetBackup Management utility Reports


2nd NetBackup Management utility Policies
3rd NetBackup Management utility Storage
4th NetBackup Management utility Catalog
5th NetBackup Management utility Host Properties
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

15 Click the symbol to the left of Reports, to expand Reports.

16 Briefly view the names of the reports that are listed and note the categories of
reports that can be further expanded; Tape Reports, Disk Reports, and Vault
Reports.

17 Click Policies in the left pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


100 B–96 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The All Policies pane is displayed, along with a pane that displays the details
of the policy that is selected.

Note: No policies are currently configured on the master server.

18 Click the symbol to the left of Storage in the left pane of the Administration
Console, to expand Storage. Note the entries displayed under Storage.

– Storage Units
– Storage Unit Groups
– Storage Lifecycle Policies

19 Click the symbol to the left of Host Properties, in the left pane of the
B
Administration Console, to expand Host Properties.

20 Click the Master Servers object, located under Host Properties.

An entry for your master server, lnxmaster.example.com, is displayed


in the right pane of the Administration Console.

21 Right-click the entry for the master server in the right pane. Click Properties
in the resulting menu.

The Master Server Properties window is displayed.


The left pane of the Master Server Properties window displays a long list of
categories used to configure the behavior of your master server and of your
NetBackup environment.

22 Click Global Attributes in the left pane of the Master Server Host
Properties.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

23 Briefly view the parameters that are configured on the Global Attributes
screen.

24 Click Retention Periods in the left pane of the Master Server Properties.

25 What Retention Period is associated with Retention Level 8?

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


101 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–97
Retention Level 8 Retention Period: 1 year

26 Click Servers in the left pane of the Master Server Properties dialog box.

27 Record the names of the systems included in the Additional servers tab of the
Master Server Host Properties.

Server name: lnxmedia.example.com


Server name: winserver.example.com

28 Select the Media Servers and OpsCenter Servers tabs of the Servers screen,
one at a time, and view the contents of those tabs.

29 Click Cancel to close the Master Server Properties dialog box, without
making changes to the host properties.

30 Click the symbol to the left of NetBackup Management to contract that


branch of object tree.

31 Click the symbol to the left of Media and Device Management to expand the
Media and Device Management branch of the object tree. Note the four
entries displayed under Media and Device Management.

– Device Monitor
– Media
– Devices
– Credentials
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

32 Click Device Monitor and briefly view the contents of the right pane of the
Administration Console.

The right pane displays a list of configured tape drives and enables the
monitoring of the status of the drives.
There are currently no tape devices configured in your NetBackup
environment.
There are two tabs at the bottom of the Device Monitor, Drives and Disk
Pool.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


102 B–98 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
33 Select Media and Device Management > Media, in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

The right pane displays a list of all configured tape volumes. There are
currently no tape volume entries displayed.

34 Click the symbol to the left of Media, located under the Media and Device
Management.

35 Record the names of the four objects that are displayed when you expand the
Media entry.

Volume Pools
B
Volume Groups
Robots
Standalone

36 Click the symbol to the left of Devices to display the objects under Media and
Device Management.

37 Note the objects displayed under Devices; Drives, Robots, Media Servers,
Server Groups, SAN Clients, Topology, and Disk Pools.

38 Click to expand the Credential object that is displayed under Media and
Device Management.

39 Note the objects displayed under Credentials; Disk Array Hosts, NDMP
Hosts, Storage Servers, and Virtual Machine Servers.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Accessing the NetBackup Administration Console from other


NetBackup server systems
In the steps that follow, you run the NetBackup Administration Console on a
media server system and connect the Administration Console to the master server
system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


103 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–99
Note: The ability to perform remote administration of NetBackup using a remote
NetBackup Administration Console or NetBackup Java Console depends
on various factors, determined by the type of NetBackup Administration
Console being used (Windows or Java). See the NetBackup Administration
Guide for further details.

1 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.

lnxmedia

2 Right-click the Terminal icon located on the desktop of your media server
system and select Open.

Note: A Terminal window may remain open from the previous lab activity. If a
Terminal window is open from a previous activity, close that window and
open a new Terminal window.

3 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed. Take


note that the Host name field of the login window displays the name of the
master server system, lnxmaster.example.com.

4 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User


name (password = training).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

6 Note the top entry in the object tree displayed in the left pane of the
Administration Console. Record the host name that is displayed.

Host name: lnxmaster.example.com

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


104 B–100 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Note that the NetBackup Administration Console now displays all the
functions and capabilities that are available when the Administration Console
is run directly on the master server system.

8 Briefly browse the NetBackup Administration Console to view the functions


available.

9 Close the NetBackup Administration Console window on your media server


system.

Note: You use the NetBackup Administration Console extensively throughout


the remainder of this course. Generally, in this course, you will use the
NetBackup Administration Console directly on the master server system.
B

10 Close the terminal window on your media server system.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


105 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–101
Exercise 2: Exploring the OpsCenter Web interface

In this lab exercise, you briefly access and explore the Web-based interface
provided by OpsCenter. OpsCenter provides monitoring and reporting capabilities
for NetBackup and other supported backup applications.

1 Access the console of your winserver system. In this lab environment, this
system is a Windows-based system.

winserver

2 Log on to winserver using the student user ID.

3 Locate the WebUI Login icon on the desktop of winserver. Right-click on


WebUI Login and select Open.

When the browser window opens, a message is displayed indicating “There is


a problem with this Website’s security certificate”.

4 Click Continue to this website (not recommended).

The OpsCenter log on screen is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


106 B–102 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 Type the default OpsCenter username and password and click Log On.

Username: admin
Password: password
Domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx) (provided by default)

Note: If the Domain field on the OpsCenter Log On screen is vacant it generally
indicates that the OpsCenter server services may not be running. If you
encounter this situation, notify your instructor.

The OpsCenter Web interface is displayed.

6 Expand your Web browser window to full screen display. B

7 Note the primary tabs provided by the OpsCenter interface.


– Home
– Monitor
– Manage
– Reports
– Search & Hold
– Settings

The Monitor tab is selected by default.

8 Note the sub-tabs located under the Monitor tab, including the Overview,
Jobs, Services, and Policies tabs.

9 Navigate to and select the Monitor > Services sub-tab.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Note the services that are listed, the host name associated with each service,
and the status of the services. Note that there are multiple pages of services.

11 Navigate to and select the Reports > Report Templates sub-tab.

12 Note the standard report categories listed under Report Templates.


– Audit Reports
– Backup
– Catalog

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


107 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–103
– Chargeback
– Client Reports
– Cloud Reports
– Disk & Tape Activity
– Hold Reports
– Media Reports
– Performance Reports
– Policy Reports
– Restore
– Storage Lifecycle Policy
– Workload Analyzer
– Enterprise Vault Archiving

You can expand the report category folders to view the reports available in
each category.

13 Locate and click the Settings tab.

14 Note the sub-tabs under the Settings tab.


– User Preferences
– Configuration
– Views
– Users
– Recipients
– Chargeback

15 Click the Settings > Configuration sub-tab.

16 Note the large number of configuration categories that are listed under the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Settings > Configuration sub-tab, including the NetBackup, Agent, License,


Data Purge, SMTP Server, ThreatCon, and other tabs.

17 Click License (under Settings > Configuration).

18 Note that No License Keys are Configured. OpsCenter does not need a
license key to perform most functions.

19 Click the NetBackup tab.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


108 B–104 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
20 Record the name of the NetBackup master server listed under the NetBackup
tab.

NetBackup master server lnxmaster.example.com

Note: The presence of a master server name under the Settings > Configuration
> NetBackup tab indicates that OpsCenter has been configured to collect
information from that master server.

21 View the information displayed in the General tab located at the bottom of the
OpsCenter user interface. B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

22 Click to view the Data Collection Status tab to view detailed information
about the information types that have been collected.

23 Feel free to browse the OpsCenter user interface to view the contents of other
tabs provided by the interface.

24 Log out of OpsCenter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


109 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–105
25 Close the Web browser window.

26 Continue to the next exercise.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


110 B–106 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 3: Exploring the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI

In this lab exercise, you briefly access and explore the Backup, Archive, and
Restore (BAR) interface. This interface is used to perform user-initiated backup
and restore operations.

Exploring the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI


In the steps that follow, you explore the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI that is
provided on all NetBackup server and client systems.

1 Access the console of your lnxclient system.

B
lnxclient

2 Log on to lnxclient using the student user ID.

3 Locate and right-click the shortcut to the Terminal icon located on the desktop
of lnxclient and select Open.

4 In the Terminal window, type jbpSA&, and press Enter, to open the Backup,
Archive, and Restore GUI.

The Backup, Archive, and Restore login window is displayed.

5 Login to the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI using the student user
name (password = training).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI is displayed.

6 Note the main tabs provided by the Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR) GUI.

– Backup Files
– Restore Files
– Task Progress (of backup and restores initiated from the BAR GUI on this
client system).

7 Select Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
111 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–107
The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is displayed.

8 Record the contents of the fields indicated in the Specify NetBackup


Machines and Policy Type window.

Server to use for backups and restores lnxmaster.example.com


Source client for restores lnxclient.example.com
Destination client for restores lnxclient.example.com
Policy type for restores Standard

Note: By default, NetBackup clients (systems that are not the master server) only
have the capability to perform user-initiated backups and restores and
restores of their own files and directories. A NetBackup administrator can
enable alternate client restores on the master server allowing a user to
restore data to their machine that was backed up on another machine. More
information can be found in the NetBackup Administration Guide.

9 Click Cancel to close the Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type
window without making any changes to the parameter settings.

10 Click the Backup Files tab on the BAR GUI.

Within a few moments, a window is displayed that enables the selection of


client components for backup, including directories, and files.
At this point in the course, NetBackup configuration has not been performed to
enable the successful completion of backups.

11 Click the Restore Files tab on the BAR GUI.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Restore Files tab of the GUI enables you to browse for backup images of
the client data, and to initiate restore operations.
As of this point in the course, no backups have been performed and therefore
there are no backup images available to use for restore operations. You use the
Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI to perform restore operations throughout
the remainder of the course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


112 B–108 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
12 Close the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI window.

Solution
Select File > Exit.
End of Solution

13 Close the Terminal window on the client system.

End of lab

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


113 Lab 3: Using the NetBackup Administrative Interfaces
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–109
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


114 B–110 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media B
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson.
This lab provides practice configuring tape storage and media, to include:
• Verify that tape devices are visible to the operating systems of NetBackup
media server systems
• Configure tape devices and storage units using the Configure Storage Devices
wizard
• Verify the tape device and storage unit configuration
• Configure volume pools
• Perform a robot inventory operation to create (register) tape volume entries in
the NetBackup Database.
• Configure barcode rules and Media ID generation rules that are used by the
robotic inventory.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Verify the volume and volume pool configurations

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


115 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–111
Exercise 1: Verify tape devices are visible to OS of media servers

In this exercise you use the Configure Storage Devices wizard to configure a
robot and tape drives. The Configure Storage Devices wizard is the
recommended method for configuring tape devices in NetBackup.
In the following steps, you verify that the robot and tape drives are visible to the
Windows operating system of the lnxmaster and lnxmedia systems in your
lab environment.

Note: Verifying that the tape devices (robots and tape drives) are visible to the
operating systems of NetBackup media server systems is critically
important because devices that are not visible to the operating system
cannot be configure for use by NetBackup.

Verifying tape devices on the Linux-based master server


In the following steps, you use the Linux-provided commands to verify that tape
devices are visible at the operating system level of the master server system. In this
lab environment, the NetBackup master server system is also configured as a
media server.

1 Access the console of your master server system, lnxmaster.

lnxmaster

2 Log in to the master server using the student user ID.

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

you are, continue from the previous logged-in session.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of your master server system and
select Open.

4 At the command prompt, type su - root, to become superuser.

5 Execute the command: scan |more.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
116 B–112 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The output of the scan command displays information about the tape
hardware that is visible and configured to the operating system.
Two tape drives and a robot should be displayed in the scan output.

6 Press Enter (advance one line) or the spacebar (advance one page) to advance
the display of the command output, as required.

7 Record the information for the first tape drive that is listed.

Device Name /dev/nst1


Passthru Name /dev/sg5
Inquiry: QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414
Product ID SuperDLT1
Serial Number 71IT500604
Device Type SDT_Tape
Device Supports SCSI-2
B

8 Record the information for the second tape drive that is listed.

Device Name /dev/nst0


Passthru Name /dev/sg4
Inquiry: QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414
Product ID SuperDLT1
Serial Number 71IT500603
Device Type SDT_Tape
Device Supports SCSI-2
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Record the information for the media changer (robot) that is listed

Device Name /dev/sg3


Passthru Name /dev/sg3
Inquiry: ADIC Scalar 1000 4.11
Product ID Scalar 1000
Serial Number 71IT500602
Device Type SDT_CHANGER

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


117 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–113
Device Supports SCSI-3
Number of Drives: 2
Number of Slots 15
Number of Media Access Ports 1
Drive 1 Serial Number 71IT500603
Drive 2 Serial Number 71IT500604

Note: If two tape drives and a robot are not detected by the scan command,
notify your instructor immediately.

10 Press the spacebar to advance the display of the scan command output, until
the command prompt is displayed.

11 At the command prompt, type exit, and press Enter, to exit superuser.

Verifying tape devices on the Linux-based media server


In the following steps, you use the Linux-provided commands to verify that tape
devices are visible at the operating system level of the media server system.

1 Access the console of your media server system, lnxmedia.

lnxmedia

2 Log in to the media server using the student user ID.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: You may be logged in to the media server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, continue from the previous logged-in session.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of your media server system and
select Open.

4 At the command prompt, type su - root, to become superuser.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
118 B–114 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 Execute the command: scan |more.

The output of the scan command displays information about the tape
hardware that is visible and configured to the operating system.
Two tape drives and a robot should be displayed in the scan output.

6 Press Enter (advance one line) or the spacebar (advance one page) to advance
the display of the command output, as required.

7 Record the information for the first tape drive that is listed.

Device Name /dev/nst1


Passthru Name /dev/sg5
Inquiry: QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414
Product ID SuperDLT1
Serial Number 71IT500604
Device Type SDT_Tape
B
Device Supports SCSI-2

8 Record the information for the second tape drive that is listed.

Device Name /dev/nst0


Passthru Name /dev/sg4
Inquiry: QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414
Product ID SuperDLT1
Serial Number 71IT500603
Device Type SDT_Tape
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Device Supports SCSI-2

9 Record the information for the media changer (robot) that is listed

Device Name /dev/sg3


Passthru Name /dev/sg3
Inquiry: ADIC Scalar 1000 4.11
Product ID Scalar 1000

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


119 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–115
Serial Number 71IT500602
Device Type SDT_CHANGER
Device Supports SCSI-3
Number of Drives: 2
Number of Slots 15
Number of Media Access Ports 1
Drive 1 Serial Number 71IT500603
Drive 2 Serial Number 71IT500604

Note: If two tape drives and a robot are not detected by the scan command,
notify your instructor immediately.

10 Press the spacebar to advance the display of the scan command output, until
the command prompt is displayed.

11 At the command prompt, type exit, and press Enter, to exit superuser.

12 Close the Terminal window on your media server system.

Note: Verifying that the tape devices (robots and tape drives) are visible to the
operating systems of NetBackup media server systems is critically
important because devices that are not visible to the operating system
cannot be configure for use by NetBackup.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


120 B–116 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 2: Configure tape devices and storage units using the
Configure Storage devices wizard

In this exercise, you use the Configure Storage Devices wizard that is accessible
from the NetBackup Administration Console to configure tape storage devices
(robots and tape drives) and their associated storage units.

Note: The majority of NetBackup administration tasks are performed from the
master server system. In the following steps, you configure the tape
devices using the Configure Storage Devices wizard. The wizard is
initiated from the NetBackup Administration Console that is connected
to the master server system.

1 Access the console of your master server system, lnxmaster.

lnxmaster
B
2 Access the Terminal window that is open on the master server system.

Note: If a Terminal window is not open, right-click the Terminal icon on the
desktop of the master server system and select Open.

3 At the command prompt, type jnbSA&, and press Enter, to open the
NetBackup Administration Console.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User


name (password = training).

The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

5 Click the host name of your master server, lnxmaster.example.com,


located at the top of the object tree in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


121 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–117
The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

6 Click the Configure Storage Devices wizard.

The Welcome to the Device Configuration Wizard screen is displayed.

7 Click Next to continue.

The Device Hosts screen is displayed.


Solution
This screen lists the media server systems that are configured in your
NetBackup environment. In this environment, three media servers are
configured:
– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– winserver.example.com
End of Solution

8 On the Device Hosts screen, note that the entries for each of the media servers
is checked. When the entry for a media server is checked, prior to device
configuration NetBackup scans the media server for attached tape devices.

Note: In your lab environment, only the lnxmaster.example.com and


lnxmedia.example.com systems have attached tape hardware.
The winserver.example.com system has no attached tape
hardware.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Accept the default settings on the Device Hosts screen and click Next to start
the detection of attached tape devices.

The Scanning Hosts screen is displayed.


Solution
Within a few moments, the automatic detection of tape devices is completed
and the results are displayed on the Scanning Hosts screen.
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


122 B–118 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
10 Record the results of the device detection.

lnxmaster.example.com Detected 2 tape drive path(s) and 1


robot(s)
lnxmedia.example.com Detected 2 tape drive path(s) and 1
robot(s)
winserver.example.com No devices detected

11 Click Next to continue.

The SAN Clients screen is displayed. No changes are required on this screen.

12 Click Next to continue.

The Backup Devices screen is displayed.


This screen lists the tape devices (robots and tape drives) that were detected by
NetBackup during the device detection operation.
The Backup Devices screen displays an entry for each robot and tape drive B
that was detected.

Note: When you click on a device entry in the Device pane, the device path
information for the selected device is displayed in the bottom pane, with
path information displayed for each media server that has access to the
device. When a device is selected, you can click the Properties button to
obtain information about the selected device.

13 Record the device information, as listed in the Device pane of the Backup
Devices screen.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

First device listed ADIC Scalar 1000 4.11


Second device listed QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414
Third device listed QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414

14 Click the entry for the ADIC Scalar 1000 4.11 (the robot) that is listed on the
Backup Devices screen. Note the contents of the Host and path information,
that is displayed for the selected device.

15 Note the following information regarding the robot entry:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


123 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–119
When the ADIC Scalar entry (the robot) is selected, the device path
information is displayed for only one of the media servers listed on the screen.
This is the media server that NetBackup intends to configure as the robot
control host.

16 Using the information from the previous step, which media server is
NetBackup going to configure as the robot control host?

Robot control host:


Your answer may vary. It is anticipated that NetBackup configures the
lnxmaster.example.com media server as the robot control host.

Note: It is acceptable that any NetBackup media server that has access to the
robot can be configured as the robot control host.

17 Click the entry for the first QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414 (tape drive) that is
listed on the Backup Devices screen. Note the contents of the Host and path
information, that is displayed for the selected device.

18 Click the entry for the second QUANTUM SuperDLT1 1414 (tape drive) that
is listed on the Backup Devices screen. Note the contents of the Host and
path information, that is displayed for the selected device.

19 Note the following information, regarding the tape drive entries:

When an entry for a tape drive is selected, the device path information is
displayed for each media server that has access to the tape drive.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

20 Click Next to continue.

The Drag and Drop Configuration screen is displayed.

The tape drives associated with the robot are displayed under the entry for the
robot.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


124 B–120 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The robot and tape drive entries should have a check to the left of each entry. In
most situations the entries are checked automatically.
Solution
The check next to the drive position under the Robot entry indicates that
NetBackup is able to determine the position of each tape drive within the robot.
End of Solution

Note: For certain tape hardware NetBackup may be unable to determine the
position of a tape drive within the robot. When this occurs, the tape drive is
listed under Standalone Drives section of the Drag and Drop
Configuration screen. When this happens it is the responsibility of the
backup administrator to determine the drive positions in the robot and to
manually drag the drive or drives from the Standalone Drives area to the
correct drive position under the robot entry.

21 If either of the tape drives is listed under the Standalone Drives rather than
under the robot, notify your instructor immediately.
B
If the entries for the tape drives are listed under the entry for Robot 0 and are
checked, proceed to the next step.

22 Click Next to continue.

The Updating Device Configuration screen is displayed.


Solution
The screen displays the progress of the tape device configuration. After the
device configuration changes are changed the Device Manager Service is
restarted on each NetBackup media server for which devices were configured.
End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

23 Click Next to continue.

The Configure Storage Units screen is displayed.

Note: When the Device Configuration Wizard configures tape devices it


automatically creates storage units for each of the media servers to
which the configured tape drives are associated.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


125 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–121
Note: A media manager storage unit is required in order to allow NetBackup
to send data to a tape drive. Since there are two media servers
(lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com)
that can access the drives in the robot, the Wizard creates two storage
units, one for each media server.

24 Change the name of the master server storage unit. Use the new storage unit
name provided in the table.

Change storage unit name from: Change storage unit name to


lnxmaster-dlt3-robot-tld-0 tape_stu_lnxmaster

Solution

a Click the lnxmaster-dlt3-robot-tld-0 storage unit entry on the


Configure Storage Units screen.

The lnxmaster-dlt3-robot-tld-0 entry for the storage unit is


highlighted.

b Click the Properties button.

c When the Change Storage Unit window is displayed, change the Storage
unit name to tape_stu_lnxmaster.

d Allow all other storage unit parameters to remain at their current settings.

e Click OK to save the change to the storage unit name.

The Change Storage Unit window is closed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

25 Verify that the name of the storage unit has been changed to
tape_stu_lnxmaster.

26 Change the name of the media server storage unit. Use the new storage unit
name provided in the table.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


126 B–122 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Change storage unit name from: Change storage unit name to
lnxmedia-dlt3-robot-tld-0 tape_stu_lnxmedia

Solution

a Click the lnxmedia-dlt3-robot-tld-0 storage unit entry on the


Configure Storage Units screen.

The lnxmaster-dlt3-robot-tld-0 entry for the storage unit is


highlighted.

b Click the Properties button.

c When the Change Storage Unit window is displayed, change the Storage
unit name to tape_stu_lnxmedia.

d Allow all other storage unit parameters to remain at their current settings.

e Click OK to save the change to the storage unit name.


B
The Change Storage Unit window is closed.
End of Solution

27 Verify that the name of the storage unit has been changed to
tape_stu_lnxmedia.

28 Click Next to continue.

The Finished screen is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

29 Click Finish.

The Configure Storage Devices wizard is closed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


127 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–123
Exercise 3: Verify the tape device and storage unit configuration

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to verify the
configuration of the robot, tape drives, and storage units that you configured in the
previous exercise.

Viewing the robot configuration


In the following steps, you locate the entry for the robot in the NetBackup
Administration Console and view the robot configuration.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

2 In the left pane of the Administration Console, navigate to Media and Device
Management > Devices.

3 Click the symbol to the left of Devices to expand the Devices entry.

4 Click Robots (located under the Devices object).

The list of configured robots is displayed in the right pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

5 How many robot entries are displayed?

Number of robot entries displayed: two (2) robot entries are displayed
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution
Both robot entries are associated with the same physical robot, TLD(0).
One robot entry is associated with the media server (or Device Host),
lnxmaster.example.com.
The other robot entry is associated with the media server (Device Host),
lnxmedia.example.com.
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


128 B–124 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
6 Which media server (Device Host) is configured as the robot control host for
TLD(0)?

Robot control host name:


Your answer may vary. It is anticipated that the robot control host is
lnxmaster.example.com. The media server that is the robot control
host has an entry in the Robotic Path column of the right pane of the
Administration Console.

Note: While both media servers require the services of the robot, only one of
them can issue commands to control the robotic arm of the robot. In
NetBackup, this media server is referred to as the robot control host. When
a command is issued by a media server (Device Host) to perform a robotic
operation, such as to mount a tape in a tape drive, the command must be
sent to the robot control host. The robot control host communicates with
the robot on behalf of the requesting media server

7 Right-click the robot entry associated with the media server (Device Host) that B
is the robot control host.

The entry for the robot is highlighted.

8 In the menu, click Change.

The Change Robot window is displayed.

9 Briefly view the robot configuration parameters. Note the values selected for
the Device host, Robot control, and Robot device file parameters.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: Do not change any of these parameter settings.

10 Click Cancel to close the Change Robot window without making any
changes.

11 Right-click the robot entry associated with the media server that is not the
robot control host.

The entry for the robot is highlighted.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
129 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–125
12 In the menu, click Change.

The Change Robot window is displayed.

13 Briefly view the robot configuration parameters. Note the values selected for
the Device host, Robot control, and Robot device file parameters.

Note: Do not change any of these parameter settings.

14 Record the entries contained in the following parameter settings:

Robot control: Robot control is handled by a remote host


Robot control host: lnxmaster.example.com.

15 Click Cancel to close the Change Robot window without making any
changes.

Viewing the tape drives configuration


In the following steps, you locate the entries for the tape drives in the NetBackup
Administration Console and view the drives configuration.

1 Click the Drives object (Media and Device Management > Devices >
Drives), located in the left pane of the Administration Console.
The list of configured tape drives is displayed in the upper-right pane of the
NetBackup Administration Console screen.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 How many tape drive entries are displayed in the Drives pane of the
Administration Console?

Number of tape drive entries two (2) tape drive entries are
displayed: displayed

3 Record the content of the Device Host column for the tape drives.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


130 B–126 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Device Host column contents <Multiple>

Solution
The <Multiple> entry in the Device Host column of the tape drive display
indicates that the tape drive is a shared tape drive, shared between multiple
media server (Device Host) systems.
End of Solution

4 Scroll to the right on the Drives pane to view the information that is displayed
for the tape drives.

5 Record the following information for the first (top) tape drive that is listed in
the All Drives pane:

Drive Name QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000


Robot Number 0 (robot 0)
Robot Drive Number 2 (drive 1) B

6 Record the following information for the second (bottom) tape drive that is
listed in the All Drives pane:

Drive Name QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.001


Robot Number 0 (robot 0)
Robot Drive Number 1 (drive 1)

7 Click the entry for the top tape drive listed in the All Drives pane
(QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Note that the bottom, right pane (the Paths for selected drives pane) displays
two entries for the selected tape drive.

One entry displays the drive path information for the drive for the media
server, lnxmaster.example.com.
The other entry displays the drive path information for the drive for the media
server, lnxmedia.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


131 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–127
9 Right-click the entry for the top tape drive listed in the Drives pane
(QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000).

10 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Drive window is displayed.

11 Briefly view the information for the tape drive that is displayed in the Change
Drive window.

Note: Do not change any of the tape drive parameters.

12 Click Cancel to exit the Change Drive window without making changes to the
tape drive configuration.

13 Right-click the entry for the bottom tape drive listed in the Drives pane
(QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.001).

14 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Drive window is displayed.

15 Briefly view the information for the tape drive that is displayed in the Change
Drive window.

Note: Do not change any of the tape drive parameters.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

16 Click Cancel to exit the Change Drive window without making changes to the
tape drive configuration.

Viewing the Device Monitor


In the following steps, you view the Device Monitor that is provided in the
NetBackup Administration Console and note the information and drive
management operations that are available using the Device Monitor interface.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


132 B–128 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
1 In the left pane of the Administration Console, navigate to Media and Device
Management.

2 Click Device Monitor (located under Media and Device Management).

The right pane of the Administration Console screen is divided in to two


sections:
– The top section lists the configured tape drives.
– The bottom section lists the paths for the tape drive that is selected
(highlighted) in the top pane.

3 Note the contents of the Control column of the Device Monitor. This column
indicates the status of the tape drive.

4 Right-click the entry for the top tape drive listed in the upper pane of the
Device Monitor.

5 In the menu that is displayed, note the top five operations that can be
performed on the selected tape drive: B

– Up Drive
– Up Drive, Operator Control
– Down Drive
– Reset Drive
– Drive Cleaning

6 Do not select any of the items in the menu at this time. Click anywhere outside
of the menu to close the menu.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


133 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–129
Exercise 4: Configure volume pools

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to configure


volume pools. The volume pools required are determined by the backup
administrator.

Note: The majority of NetBackup administration tasks are performed from the
master server system. In the following steps, you configure volume pools
using NetBackup Administration Console that is connected to the master
server system.

lnxmaster

1 In the open NetBackup Administration Console window, navigate to and


expand Media and Device Management in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Click the symbol to the left of Media to expand the Media entry.

3 Under the Media entry, click the symbol to the left of Volume Pools to expand
the Volume Pools entry.

4 Click Volume Pools.

5 Record the names of the default volume pools that are listed in the right pane
of the right pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Volume Pool name CatalogBackup


Volume Pool name DataStore
Volume Pool name NetBackup
Volume Pool name None

Note: The CatalogBackup, DataStore, NetBackup, and None volume


pools are automatically created by NetBackup.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


134 B–130 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
6 Create a scratch_tapes volume pool. Give this pool the attributes listed in
the following table:

Pool name: scratch_tapes


Description: Scratch pool
Maximum number of partially full media: 0
Scratch pool: checked
Catalog Backup pool: not checked

Solution

a Right-click Volume Pools.

b Click New Volume Pool.

The Add a New Volume Pool window is displayed.

c In the Pool name field, type scratch_tapes.

d In the Description field, type Scratch pool. B

e Mark the check box for Scratch pool.

f Leave all other default settings.

g Click OK to save the volume pool.

End of Solution

7 View the list of volume pools in the right pane of the Administration Console
and verify that the scratch_tapes volume pool has been added.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


135 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–131
8 Create a server_tapes volume pool. Give this pool the attributes listed in
the following table:

Pool name: server_tapes


Description: For backups
Maximum number of partially full media: 0
Scratch pool: not checked
Catalog Backup pool: not checked

Solution

a Right-click Volume Pools.

b Click New Volume Pool.

The Add a New Volume Pool window is displayed.

c In the Pool name field, type server_tapes.

d In the Description field, type For backups.

e Leave all other default settings

f Click OK to save the volume pool.

End of Solution

9 View the list of volume pools in the right pane of the Administration Console
and verify that the server_tapes volume pool has been added.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


136 B–132 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
10 Create a duplicate_tapes volume pool. Give this pool the attributes
listed in the following table:

Volume Pool name: duplicate_tapes


Description: For multiple copies
Maximum number of partially full media: 0
Scratch Pool not checked
Catalog Backup not checked

Solution

a Right-click Volume Pools.

b Click New Volume Pool.

The Add a New Volume Pool window is displayed.

c In the Pool name field, type duplicate_tapes.

d In the Description field, type For multiple copies. B

e Leave all other default settings.

f Click OK to save the volume pool.

End of Solution

11 View the list of volume pools in the right pane of the Administration Console
and verify that the duplicate_tapes volume pool has been added.

12 Verify that the volume pools listed in the table are currently displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


137 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–133
Volume Pool Name Description Scratch
CatalogBackup NetBackup Catalog Backup pool No
DataStore the DataStore pool No
duplicate_tapes For multiple copies No
NetBackup the NetBackup pool No
None the none pool No
scratch_tapes Scratch pool Yes
server_tapes For backups No

Note: If you click the heading of the Volume Pool column, in the right pane of the
Administration Console, you change the sort order of the volume pools list.
Click the column heading until the tapes are sorted in alphabetic order, to
match the list shown in the tape.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


138 B–134 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 5: Configure volumes using the Configure Volumes
wizard

In this exercise, you use the Configure Volumes wizard of the NetBackup
Administration Console to configure tape volumes for use by NetBackup. Prior
to configuring the volumes you create bar code rules and media ID generation
rules that the robot inventory operation uses during the volume configuration
operation.

Running the Configure Volumes wizard


In the following steps, you run the Configure Volumes wizard, and perform the
steps required to create bar code rules for the configured robot.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master B


server system.

2 Click the name of the master server, lnxmaster.example.com, that is


listed at the top of the object tree in the left pane of the Administration
Console.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Click the Configure Volumes wizard in the right pane of the Administration
Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Welcome to the Volume Configuration Wizard screen is displayed.

4 Click Next to continue.

The Select Device window is displayed.


In the Select Device window there are entries for each of the NetBackup media
servers that are configured in this environment.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


139 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–135
Note: In Exercise 2 of this lab activity you identified the robot control host for the
robot in your lab environment.

5 Record the name of your robot control host in the space provided.

Robot control host name: The robot control host name may vary.

6 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for your robot control host on the
Select Device window.

Click the entry for the robot, TLD(0), located under the hostname of your
robot control host.

Note: The robot you have selected is the robot you are going to inventory for the
purpose of adding tape volumes to NetBackup.

7 Click Next to continue.

8 Note the WARNING message displayed on the Robot Inventory screen.

Note: Before performing the robot inventory to create tape volumes, you must
create bar code rules and media ID generation rules that may be required
for the robot.

Configuring Advanced Options during a robot inventory


In the following steps, you configure the Advanced Options used in performing a
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

robot inventory, including configuring bar code rules, Media ID generation rules,
and rules for adding new media.

1 Click the Advanced Options button on the Robot Inventory screen of the
Volume Configuration Wizard.
The Advanced Robot Inventory Options window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


140 B–136 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
2 Note the four tabs that are available at the top of the Advanced Robot
Inventory Options window:

– Media Settings
– Barcode Rules
– Media ID Generation
– Media Type Mappings

Configuring bar code rules B


In the steps that follow, you configure a bar code rule.

3 Click the Barcode Rules tab.

4 Add a new barcode rule that has the characteristics described in the table.

Barcode tag: CLN


Maximum cleanings: 25
Media type: DLT cleaning tape 3
Volume pool: None (greyed out)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Description: cleaning tapes

Solution

a Click New.

The New Barcode Rule dialog box is displayed.

b In the Barcode tag field type CLN

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


141 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–137
c For Media type use the drop-down menu and select DLT cleaning
tape 3.

d In the Maximum cleanings field type 25.

e In the Description field, type cleaning tapes.

f Click OK to save the new barcode rule.

End of Solution

5 Verify that the barcode rule having a Barcode Tag of CLN is visible on the
Barcode Rules tab.

Note: The steps you have just performed are intended to show you how easy it is
to create a barcode rule. The tape library used in this lab environment does
not include a cleaning tape or a tape with a barcode label beginning with
CLN. Because of this, the barcode rule you have created will not result in
the configuration of a cleaning tape.

Viewing the Media ID Generation tab


In the following steps, you view the Media ID Generation tab of the Advanced
Robot Inventory Options screen and use the information provided to determine if
a new Media ID Generation rule is required in this lab environment.

6 Click the Media ID Generation tab on the Advanced Robot Inventory


Options screen.

7 According to the text at the top of the Media ID Generation tab, by default,
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

which six characters of the barcode does NetBackup use in generating its
media IDs? Record your answer in the space provided

Answer:
By default, NetBackup uses the last (right-most) six characters of barcode
label to create its media IDs.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


142 B–138 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The barcodes on the tapes in the tape library provided in this environment are
listed in the following table.

Barcodes on tapes Robot slot


provided location
00090000 0
00090001 1
00090002 2
00090003 3
00090004 4
00090005 5
00090006 6
00090007 7
00090008 8
00090009 9
0009000A 10
0009000B 11 B
0009000C 12
0009000D 13

8 Use the information obtained in the previous step to answer the question:

In this scenario, is a new Media ID Generation rule required in order to


generate unique Media IDs?

Answer:
No. In this scenario the last six digits of the barcode labels supplied in the
tape library are unique. Therefore, the default Media ID Generation rule
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

is sufficient to generate unique Media IDs in NetBackup.

Configuring a one time override for adding new media


In this lab environment, the backup administrator has a special need to add more
DLT cartridge tapes to the scratch_tapes volume pool. To accomplish this
the administrator can configure a one time override, using the Media Settings tab,
during a robot inventory operation to logically place the new media into the
scratch_tapes volume pool. Once the robot inventory is performed the Media
Settings are reset to default values.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
143 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–139
9 Click the Media Settings tab on the Advanced Robot Inventory Options
screen.

10 In the New media portion of the screen, set the “If set, the following options
will override any barcode rules” parameters to values as shown in the
following table:

Media type: DLT cartridge tape 3


Volume pool: scratch_tapes

Solution
Under “If set, the following options will override any barcode rules”, set the
parameters as follows:

a Select the DLT cartridge tape 3 choice from the drop-down list for the
Media type field.

b Select the scratch_tapes volume pool from the Volume pool drop-
down list.

c Verify the New media settings on the Media Settings tab.

End of Solution

Note: The creation of the New media override described in the previous step
causes NetBackup to register any newly discovered tapes during that
specific robot inventory into the scratch_tapes pool with media type
DLT3. This override does not affect tapes that are already known to
NetBackup. When a NetBackup robot inventory operation encounters a
tape for which an entry already exists in the NetBackup database, that tape
remains in the volume pool in which it currently resides and of the media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

type it was assigned to.

11 Click OK to save the settings of the Advanced Robot Inventory Options


window.

12 The Advanced Robot Inventory Options screen is closed and you are
returned to the Robot Inventory screen of the Volume Configuration Wizard.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


144 B–140 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Performing the robot inventory.
In the steps that follow, you perform the robot inventory to identify the tape
volumes in the tape library and create new volume (media ID) entries in the
NetBackup database for any new tapes that are discovered.

1 Click Next to continue, on the Robot Inventory screen of the Volume


Configuration Wizard.

The wizard initiates the robot inventory and displays the results in the Results
pane of the Robot Inventory screen of the wizard.

2 Scroll through the contents of the Results pane. Note the Media IDs that were
detected during the robot inventory, and the actions taken by the wizard to
create the Media ID entries in the NetBackup catalogs.

During the robot inventory, were any mismatches reported (in the Results
pane) between the robot contents and the NetBackup volume configuration?

Answer:
Your answer may vary. Several mismatches should have been reported
B
between the robot contents and the NetBackup database. This is due to
the fact that this is a new installation and the NetBackup databases did not
know about any tapes in the library. Mismatches may also be detected
when tapes are rearranged, taken out, or put into the library and then a
robot inventory is performed.

3 Click Next in the Robot Inventory window, to continue.

The Identify Cleaning Media screen is displayed.

There is no cleaning tape in the robot.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Click Next on the Identify Cleaning Media screen, to continue

The Finished screen of the Volume Configuration Wizard is displayed.

5 Click Finish to exit the wizard.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


145 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–141
Exercise 6: Verifying the volume and volume pool configuration

In this exercise, you perform steps to view and verify the configuration of the
volumes and volume pools created in this lab activity.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master


server.

2 Navigate to and expand Media and Device Management in the NetBackup


Administration Console.

3 Click Media, under Media and Device Management.

4 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration
Console (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update the display of media
information in the right pane of the Administration Console.

5 Maximize the NetBackup Administration Console window to fill the screen.

6 The Media ID entries for the tape volumes configured in NetBackup are
displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

7 In what Volume Pool do all the media IDs currently reside?


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Answer:
All media IDs should currently reside in the scratch_tapes volume
pool.

8 Click the heading of the left-most column (Media ID) in the right pane of the
Administration Console, so that the highest numbered media ID (09000D) is
listed at the top of the Media ID list.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


146 B–142 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: Clicking the heading of a column in the media pane changes the sort order
of the media list. The sorting method varies depending upon the contents of
the column. Each click on a column heading changes the sort order of the
media list. For example, the Media ID column can be sorted in ascending
numeric order (lowest to highest), or in descending numeric order (highest
to lowest).

9 Click the heading of the left-most column (Media ID) again, so that the lowest
numbered media ID (090000) is listed at the top of the Media ID list.

10 Record the media ID of the last (bottom) volume listed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

Media ID: The media ID is 09000D.

11 Perform the steps to change Media ID 09000D into the CatalogBackup


volume pool. B

Solution

a Right-click the entry for the last (bottom) media ID (09000D) listed in the
right pane of the Administration Console.

b Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Volumes window is displayed.

Note that the Media ID you selected (09000D) is displayed in the top pane
of the Change Volumes window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

c Click the New pool radio button located in the Volume pool section of the
Change Volumes window.

d Click the arrow for the drop-down list in the Volume pool section of the
Change Volumes window.

e Click CatalogBackup in the drop-down list.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


147 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–143
f Click OK to perform the Change Volumes task.

End of Solution

The Change Volumes window is closed.

12 Click the Refresh icon (or View > Refresh) on the NetBackup
Administration Console tool bar to update the media information displayed in
the right pane of the Administration Console.

13 Verify that Media ID 09000D is now a member of the CatalogBackup


volume pool.

14 Select View > Column Layout to change the column layout of the Media
pane of the Administration Console so that the media columns are displayed in
the following order (from left to right):

Column position
(from left) Column label
1st column: Media ID
2nd column: Barcode
3rd column: Media Status
4th column: Time Assigned
5th column: Volume Pool
6th column: Robot Number
7th column: Slot
8th column: Images
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9th column: Valid Images


10th column: Data Expiration
11th column and per your preference.
following:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


148 B–144 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Select the name of the column heading, and use Move Up and Move Down
buttons to reposition the column heading in the list of displayed columns. You
can use the Show and Hide buttons in the Column Layout window to either
display or hide media columns.
Solution

a Right-click the entry for any media ID listed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

b Click Columns in resulting menu.

c Click Layout in the resulting sub-menu.

d The Column Layout window is displayed.

e Locate and click the entry for the Media Status heading. Move the Media
Status heading so that it occupies the third (3rd) position from the top of
the Heading list.

f Locate and click the entry for the Time Assigned heading. Move the Time
Assigned heading so that it occupies the fourth (4th) position from the top
B
of the Heading list.

g Locate and click the entry for the Volume Pool heading. Move the Volume
Pool heading so that it occupies the fifth (5th) position from the top of the
Heading list.

h Locate and click the entry for the Robot Number heading. Move the
Robot Number heading so that it occupies the sixth (6th) position from the
top of the Heading list.

i Locate and click the entry for the Slot heading. Move the Slot heading so
that it occupies the seventh (7th) position from the top of the Heading list.

j Locate and click the entry for the Images heading. Move the Images
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

heading so that it occupies the eighth (8th) position from the top of the
Heading list.

k Locate and click the entry for the Valid Images heading. Move the Valid
Images heading so that it occupies the ninth (9th) position from the top of
the Heading list.

l Locate and click the entry for the Data Expiration heading. Move the
Data Expiration heading so that it occupies the tenth (10th) position from
the top of the Heading list.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


149 Lab 4: Configuring Tape Storage and Media Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–145
m Feel free to arrange additional media column headings according to your
preferences.

n Click OK to save the Column Layout settings.

End of Solution

15 View the media list in the right pane of the Administration Console and verify
that the columns are displayed in the order indicated in the previous step.

Note: The column layout described in the previous step is for example purposes
only. You are free to modify the column layout to meet your preferences.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


150 B–146 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Configuring basic disk storage units using the NetBackup Administration
Console
• Configuring AdvancedDisk storage servers, disk pools, and storage units using B
the NetBackup wizards
• Viewing the status of disk storage using the NetBackup administrative
interfaces

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and


solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


151 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–147
Exercise 1: Configuring basic disk storage units

In this exercise, you configure basic disk storage units using the NetBackup
Administration Console.

Identifying disk storage volumes for basic disk storage units


In the following steps, you identify the disk volumes on the master server and
media server systems that you use as the target volumes for NetBackup basic disk
storage units.

1 Access the console of the master server system

lnxmaster

2 Log in to the master server system using the student user ID.

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, continue from the previous logged-in session.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server and select
Open.

4 Type df -k, and press Enter to display a listing of the file systems
configured on the master server. The table lists the configured file systems:

Filesystem Mounted on
/dev/sda1 /
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

/dev/sdb1 /catalogs
/dev/sdb2 /data
/dev/sdb3 /bdisk_stu
/dev/sdb4 /advdsk1
/dev/sdb5 /advdsk2
/dev/sdb6 /advdsk3

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


152 B–148 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 For purposes of this lab environment, the /dev/sdb3 disk volume, mounted
on /bdisk_stu has been set aside as the disk volume to use for the basic
disk storage unit on the master server system.

Note: The basic disk storage unit that utilizes this disk volume is for
demonstration purposes. The disk volume size is smaller than would be
allocated for use in a production backup environment and is not
representative of the typical disk volume capacities used for a NetBackup
disk storage unit.

Configuring a basic disk storage unit on the master server


In the steps that follow, you configure a basic disk storage unit on the master server
system using the NetBackup Administration Console.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master


server system.

Note: If a NetBackup Administration Console window is not open, execute B


jnbSA& in a terminal window, and login to the Administration Console
using the student user ID.

2 Click the symbol to the left of NetBackup Management to expand


NetBackup Management in the left pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Click the symbol to the left of Storage to expand the Storage object.

4 Click Storage Units.

The two Media Manager (tape) storage units that you configured in the
previous lab activity are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

5 Click Actions > New > New Storage Unit.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
153 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–149
The New Storage Unit window is displayed.

6 Configure a basic disk storage unit using the information provided in the table.

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings


Storage unit name: bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
Storage unit type Disk
On demand only: checked (default)
Disk type: BasicDisk
Media server: lnxmaster.example.com
Absolute path to directory /bdisk_stu
This directory can exist on the... not checked (default)
Maximum concurrent jobs 1 (default)
Reduce fragment size to: not checked (default)
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Enable Temporary Staging Area... not checked (default)
Table 1: bdisk_stu_winmaster storage unit parameters

Solution

a In the Storage unit name field, type bdisk_stu_lnxmaster.

b For the Storage unit type select Disk from the drop-down menu.

c Verify BasicDisk is selected for the Disk type.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

d Verify lnxmaster.example.com is select for Media server.

e In the Absolute pathname to directory, type /bdisk_stu.

f Leave all other default settings.

g Click OK to save the storage unit.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


154 B–150 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Verify that the bdisk_stu_lnxmaster storage unit is added to the list of
storage units displayed in right pane of the Administration Console.

Configuring a basic disk storage unit on a media server


In the following steps, you configure a basic disk storage unit associated with the
media server system, lnxmedia.

8 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.

lnxmedia

9 Log on to the media server system using the student user ID.

10 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the media server and select
Open.

11 Type df -k, and press Enter to display a listing of the file systems
configured on the master server. The table lists the configured file systems:
B
Filesystem Mounted on
/dev/sda1 /
/dev/sdb1 /data
/dev/sdb2 /msdpdata
/dev/sdb3 /msdpcat
/dev/sdb4 /bdisk_stu
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

/dev/sdb5 /staging

12 For purposes of this lab environment, the /dev/sdb4 disk volume, mounted
on /bdisk_stu has been set aside as the disk volume to use for the basic
disk storage unit on the master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


155 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–151
Note: The basic disk storage unit that utilizes this disk volume is for
demonstration purposes. The disk volume size is smaller than would be
allocated for use in a production backup environment and is not
representative of the typical disk volume capacities used for a NetBackup
disk storage unit.

13 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master


server system.

lnxmaster

14 Select NetBackup Management > Storage Units, in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

15 Click Actions > New > New Storage Unit.

The New Storage Unit window is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


156 B–152 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
16 Configure a basic disk storage unit using the information provided in the table.

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings


Storage unit name: bdisk_stu_lnxmedia
Storage unit type Disk
On demand only: checked (default)
Disk type: BasicDisk
Media server: lnxmedia.example.com
Absolute path to directory /bdisk_stu
This directory can exist on the... not checked (default)
Maximum concurrent jobs 1 (default)
Reduce fragment size to: not checked (default)
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Enable Temporary Staging Area... not checked (default)
Table 2: bdisk_stu_lnxmedia storage unit properties

Solution

a In the Storage unit name field, type bdisk_stu_lnxmedia.


B
b For the Storage unit type select Disk from the drop-down menu.

c Verify BasicDisk is selected for the Disk type.

d Verify lnxmedia.example.com is select for Media server.

e In the Absolute pathname to directory, type /bdisk_stu.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

f Leave all other default settings.

g Click OK to save the storage unit.

End of Solution

17 Verify that the bdisk_stu_lnxmedia storage unit is added to the list of


storage units displayed in right pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


157 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–153
Note: If a storage name is entered incorrectly, the storage unit cannot be renamed.
You must delete the entry for the storage unit, and recreate it.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


158 B–154 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 2: Configuring AdvancedDisk

In this exercise, you configure AdvancedDisk storage servers, disk pools, and
storage units using the NetBackup wizards.

Identifying disk storage volumes for AdvancedDisk


In the following steps, you identify the disk volumes on the master server system
that you use as the target volumes for NetBackup AdvancedDisk disk pools and
storage units.

1 Access the console of the master server system

lnxmaster

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server and select
Open.

Note: You may have an open Terminal window on the master server from a
previous lab activity. If you are, you can continue to use that Terminal
window.
B

3 At the command prompt, type df -k, and press Enter, to display a listing of
the file systems configured on the master server. The table lists the configured
file systems:

Filesystem Mounted on
/dev/sda1 /
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

/dev/sdb1 /catalogs
/dev/sdb2 /data
/dev/sdb3 /bdisk_stu
/dev/sdb4 /advdsk1
/dev/sdb5 /advdsk2
/dev/sdb6 /advdsk3

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


159 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–155
For purposes of this lab environment, the /dev/sdb4, /dev/sdb5, and /
dev/sdb6 disk volumes, mounted on advdsk1, advdsk2, and advdsk3
respectively, have been set aside as the disk volumes to use for the
AdvancedDisk disk storage units on the master server system.

Note: The capacities for the disk volumes allocated for the AdvancedDisk feature
in this lab environment are smaller than would be allocated for use in a
production backup environment. These disks are not representative of the
typical disk volume capacities used for NetBackup disk storage units.

lnxmaster

Configuring an AdvancedDisk storage server


In the steps that follow, you use the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to
configure an AdvancedDisk storage server associated with the master server
system, lnxmaster.example.com.

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console. window on the master


server system.

2 Click the name of the master server, lnxmaster.example.com, that is


listed at the top of the object tree in the left pane of the Administration
Console.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Click the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard in the right pane of the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Administration Console.

The Welcome to the Configure Disk Storage Servers Wizard screen is


displayed.

4 Use the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to configure an


AdvancedDisk storage server associated with the master server. Use the
information provided in the table to configure the storage server.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


160 B–156 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings
Type of disk storage to configure: AdvancedDisk
Media server: lnxmaster.example.com
Storage server name lnxmaster.example.com
(field is populated automatically)
Table 3: AdvancedDisk storage server parameters

Solution

a On the Welcome to the Storage Server Configuration Wizard screen,


click Next to continue.

The Add Storage Server screen is displayed.

b Verify AdvancedDisk is selected for the Add Storage Server screen.

c Click Next to continue.

An expanded Add Storage Server screen is displayed.

d Using the drop-down menu, select lnxmaster.example.com as the


Media server associated with the storage server, as indicated in the table.

The Storage server name and Storage server type fields on the Add
B
Storage Server screen are automatically populated.

e Click Next to continue.

The Storage Server Configuration Summary screen is displayed.

f Click Next to continue.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Storage Server Creation Status screen is displayed.

g Monitor the progress of the storage server creation.

When the storage server has been created, the Next button becomes
available for selection.

h Click Next to continue.

The message “Storage server lnxmaster.example.com successfully created”


is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


161 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–157
i Allow the Storage Server Creation Status screen to remain open, and
continue to the next step.

End of Solution

Configuring an AdvancedDisk disk pool


The Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard calls the Configure Disk Pool
Configuration wizard to enable the configuration of disk pools. In the steps that
follow, you create an AdvancedDisk disk pool using the Configure Disk Pool
Configuration wizard.
In this scenario, you create two AdvancedDisk disk pools associated with the
AdvancedDisk storage server on the master server.
You create the first of these pools as a continuation of running the Configure Disk
Pool Configuration wizard.
You configure the second AdvancedDisk disk pool later in this lab exercise.

5 Click Next on the Storage Server Creation Status screen to start the
Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard.

The Disk Pool Configuration Wizard is displayed.

6 Use of the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard to create an AdvancedDisk disk


pool. Use the parameters in the table to create the disk pool.

Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings


Disk Pool Type: AdvancedDisk
Storage server: lnxmaster.example.com
Disk volumes for this disk pool: /advdsk1
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

/advdsk2
Disk pool name: adv_dpool1_lnxmaster
Comments: master server AdvancedDisk disk
pool
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Limit I/O streams: not checked (default)
Table 4: adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool parameters

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


162 B–158 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Solution
The Disk Pool Configuration Wizard is started automatically from the
Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard and the Welcome to the Disk
Pool Configuration Wizard screen is displayed.

a Click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool screen is displayed.

b Verify AdvancedDisk is selected for the Type of Disk Pool.

c Click Next to continue.

The Select Storage Server screen is displayed.

d For the Storage server name, mark the check box for
lnxmaster.example.com, as indicated in the table.

e Click Next to continue.

The Select Volumes screen is displayed.

f Click the entries for the /advdisk1 and /advdisk2 disk volumes,
as indicated in the table. (This disk pool includes only two disk volumes.)

g Verify that you have selected two disk volumes for inclusion in this disk
pool, as indicated in the table. B

h Click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool Properties screen is displayed.

i In the Disk pool name, type adv_dpool1_lnxmaster and in the


Comments field type master server AdvancedDisk disk
pool, as described in the table. Allow the remaining parameters on the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Additional Disk Pool Information screen to remain at their default


settings.

j Click Next to continue.

The Summary screen is displayed.

k Verify that the information for the disk pool displayed on the Summary
screen matches the information provided in the table. Use the back button
to make any changes required to the disk pool settings.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


163 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–159
l When you are satisfied with the disk pool settings, click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool Configuration screen is displayed.


When the disk pool has been created, the “Configuration completed
successfully” message is displayed on the screen.

m Click Next to continue.

End of Solution

Creating a storage unit that uses the AdvancedDisk disk pool


In the following steps, you continue the use of the Disk Pool Configuration
Wizard to create a storage unit that uses the AdvancedDisk disk pool you created
in the previous steps of this lab exercise.

In the previous step of this exercise, you created the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster


AdvancedDisk disk pool. The Disk Pool Configuration Wizard remains open
from the creation of the disk pool.
The Storage Unit creation screen is currently displayed.

7 Note that the “Create a Storage Unit that uses the disk pool” check box is
selected on the Storage Unit creation screen.

8 Click Next to continue.

9 Configure the storage unit using the information provided in the table.

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings


Storage unit name: advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Media Server:
Use only the selected media selected
servers:
entry for
lnxmaster.example.com selected
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Maximum fragment size: 524288 (default)
Table 5: advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster storage unit parameters

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


164 B–160 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Solution

a In the Storage unit name field, type advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster.

b Select the radio button for Only use the selected media servers.

c Mark the check box for lnxmaster.example.com.

d Leave all other default settings.

e Click Next to continue.

The Finished screen of the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard is displayed.


End of Solution

10 Click Finish on the Finished screen to exit the Disk Pool Configuration
Wizard.

Creating an additional AdvancedDisk disk pool and storage unit


In the following steps, you create an additional AdvancedDisk disk pool and
storage unit associated with the AdvancedDisk storage server on the master server
system.
B
1 Use the Configure Disk Pool wizard and the information provided in the table
to create an additional AdvancedDisk disk pool associated with the
AdvancedDisk storage server on the master server,
lnxmaster.example.com.

Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings


Disk Pool Type: AdvancedDisk
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Storage server: lnxmaster.example.com


Disk volumes for this disk pool: /advdsk3
Disk pool name: adv_dpool2_lnxmaster
Table 6: adv_dpool2_lnxmaster disk pool parameters

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


165 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–161
Comments: master server AdvancedDisk disk
pool
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Limit I/O streams: not checked (default)
Table 6: adv_dpool2_lnxmaster disk pool parameters

Solution

a Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server


system.

b Click the top entry in the left pane of the Administration Console. This is
the lnxmaster.example.com (Master Server) entry.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the


Administration Console.

c Click the Configure Disk Pool wizard.

The Welcome to the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard screen is


displayed.

d Click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool screen is displayed.

e Verify the AdvancedDisk entry is selected.

f Click Next to continue.

The Select Storage Server screen is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

g For Storage servers, mark the check box for


lnxmaster.example.com, as indicated in the table.

h Click Next to continue.

The Select Volumes screen is displayed.

i Mark the check box for the disk volume /advdsk3, as indicated the table.
(This disk pool includes only one disk volume.)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


166 B–162 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
j Verify that you have selected a single disk volume for inclusion in this disk
pool, as indicated in the table.

k Click Next to continue.

The Additional Disk Pool Information screen is displayed.

l In the Disk Pool name field type adv_dpool2_lnxmaster and in the


Comments field type master server AdvancedDisk disk
pool. Allow the remaining parameters on the Additional Disk Pool
Information screen to remain at their default settings.

m Click Next to continue.

The Summary screen is displayed.

n Verify that the information for the disk pool displayed on the Summary
screen matches the information provided in the table. Use the back button
to make any changes required to the disk pool settings.

o When you are satisfied with the disk pool settings, click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool Configuration screen is displayed.


When the disk pool has been created, the “Configuration completed
successfully” message is displayed on the screen.

p Click Next to continue.


B
End of Solution

2 Allow the Disk Pool Creation Wizard to remain open to enable the
completion of the next steps.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


167 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–163
3 Use the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard and the information provided in the
to create a storage unit associated with the disk pool you created in the
previous steps (adv_dpool2_lnxmaster).

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings


Storage unit name: advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster
Media Server:
Use only the selected media selected
servers:
entry for
lnxmaster.example.com selected
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Maximum fragment size: 524288 (default)
Table 7: advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster storage unit parameters

Solution

a Access the Disk Pool Creation Wizard that remains open from the
creation of the advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster disk pool in the previous
steps.

The Storage Unit creation screen of the Disk Pool Creation Wizard is
currently displayed.

b Note that the “Create a Storage Unit that uses the disk pool” check box
is selected on the Storage Unit creation screen

c Click Next to continue.

d In the Storage unit name field, type advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

e Mark the radio dial for Only use the selected media servers.

f Mark the check box for lnxmaster.example.com.

g Leave all other default settings.

h Click Next to continue.

The Finished screen of the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard is displayed.


End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


168 B–164 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
4 Click Finish on the Finished screen to exit the Disk Pool Creation Wizard.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


169 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–165
Exercise 3: Viewing the status of disk storage

In this exercise, you view the status of the configured storage servers, disk pools,
and disk storage units using the administrative interfaces provided in NetBackup.

Viewing storage server information


In the following steps, you locate and view information on configured storage
servers using the NetBackup Administration Console.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master


server.

2 Navigate to and expand Media and Device Management > Credentials in the
left pane of the Administration Console.

3 Click Storage servers, located under Credentials.

The configured Storage Servers are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console. Only a single storage server entry is listed.

4 Right-click the entry for the storage server, lnxmaster.example.com.

5 Note the functions available in the resulting menu.

None of the menu functions provide for the ability to view or modify the
storage unit settings. The columns displayed in the Storage Servers pane reflect
the simplicity of the storage unit parameter settings.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Viewing disk pool information


In the following steps, you locate and view information on configured disk pools
using the NetBackup Administration Console.

1 Navigate to and expand Media and Device Management > Devices in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

2 Click Disk Pools, located under Devices.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
170 B–166 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Disk Pools pane is displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Note the entries for the disk pools that are displayed in the Disk Pools pane.
These are the AdvancedDisk disk pools you created in the previous exercise.

4 Right-click the entry for the top disk pool listed,


adv_dpool1_lnxmaster.

5 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

6 Briefly view the parameters associated with the disk pool. Note that the disk
pool includes two disk volumes, the /advdsk1 and /advdsk2 disk
volumes.

7 Click Cancel to exit the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool.

8 Right-click the entry for the top disk pool listed,


adv_dpool1_lnxmaster.
B
9 Click Inventory Disk Pool in the resulting menu.

The Inventory Disk Pool window is displayed.

10 Click the Start Inventory button to initiate the inventory of the disk pool.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Within a few moments the results of the inventory operation are displayed in
the Results pane.

11 Briefly view the results of the inventory operation.

12 Click Close to exit the Inventory Disk Pool window.

13 Right-click the entry for the bottom disk pool listed,


adv_dpool2_lnxmaster.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


171 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–167
14 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

15 Briefly view the parameters associated with the disk pool. Note that the disk
pool includes a single disk volumes, the /advdsk3 disk volume.

16 Click Cancel to exit the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool.

Monitoring disk pool status using the Device Monitor


In the following steps, you briefly view the status of disk pools using interfaces
provided in the NetBackup Administration Console.

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on your master


server system.

lnxmaster

2 Navigate to and expand Media and Device Management > Device Monitor
in the left pane of the Administration Console.

When the Device Monitor is selected, the right side of the NetBackup
Administration Console displays two panes.
The top pane is the Drives pane, and displays status and information about
configured tape drives.
By default, the bottom pane displays drive path information for tape drives
selected in the Drives pane.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

There are two tabs available for selection at the bottom of the bottom pane: the
Drives tab and the Disk Pool tab.

3 Click the Disk Pool tab at the bottom of the right pane.

4 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar of the Administration Console (or F5, or
View > Refresh) to update the Device Monitor display.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


172 B–168 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 Note that the right pane of the Administration Console displays a list of all
configured disk pools.

6 Record the status of the two configured disk pools:

Disk Pool Name Disk Pool Status


adv_dpool1_lnxmaster The expected status is Up.
adv_dpool2_lnxmaster The expected status is Up.

7 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool.

8 Click Down Disk Pool in the resulting menu.

9 Note the status of the disk pool in the right pane of the Administration Console.

The status of the disk pool has changed to Down.

10 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool.

11 Click Up Disk Pool in the resulting menu.

B
12 Note the status of the disk pool in the right pane of the Administration Console

The status of the disk pool has changed to Up.

Monitoring disk pool status using the Disk Reports


In the following steps, you briefly view the status of disk pools using the Disk
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Reports provided in the NetBackup Administration Console.

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on your master


server system.

lnxmaster

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


173 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–169
2 Navigate to and expand NetBackup Management > Reports > Disk Reports
in the left pane of the Administration Console.

3 Expand Disk Reports.

4 Click the Disk Pool Status report.

When the Disk Pool Status report is selected, the right pane of the
Administration Console displays the Report Settings information and Disk
Pool Status pane.

5 Click Run Report in the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 The Disk Pool Status pane displays information for the two AdvancedDisk
disk pools that you configured previously.

7 Briefly view the information displayed in the output of the Disk Pool Status
report.

Viewing disk storage unit information


In the steps that follow, you use interfaces provided in the NetBackup
Administration Console to view information on the disk storage units that are
configured in your NetBackup environment.

1 Access the on NetBackup Administration Console window on your master


server system.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmaster

2 Navigate to and expand NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units
in the left pane of the Administration Console.

The right pane of the Administration Console displays a list of all storage units
configured in your NetBackup environment. Both Media Manager and disk
storage unit types are listed, including entries for the basic disk and
AdvancedDisk storage units configured earlier in this lab activity.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


174 B–170 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
3 Locate and right-click the entry for the bdisk_stu_lnxmaster storage
unit.

4 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Storage Unit window is displayed.

5 Briefly view the parameters associated with the bdisk_stu_lnxmaster


storage unit.

6 Click Cancel to close the Change Storage Unit window without changing the
parameter settings for the storage unit.

7 Locate and right-click the entry for the advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster


storage unit.

8 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Storage Unit window is displayed.

9 Briefly view the parameters associated with the storage unit


(advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster).
B
10 Click Cancel to close the Change Storage Unit window without changing the
parameter settings for the storage unit.

11 You can view the configuration of the remaining disk storage units as you
choose.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: Do not change the parameter settings for the configured storage units.

Monitoring disk storage unit status using the Disk Reports


In the following steps, you briefly view the status of disk storage units using the
Disk Reports provided in the NetBackup Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


175 Lab 5: Configuring Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–171
1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on your master
server system.

lnxmaster

2 Navigate to and expand NetBackup Management > Reports > Disk Reports
in the left pane of the Administration Console.

3 Expand Disk Reports.

4 Click the Disk Storage Unit Status report.

When the Disk Storage Unit Status report is selected, the right pane of the
Administration Console displays the Report Settings information and Disk
Storage Unit Status pane.

5 Click Run Report in the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 The Disk Storage Unit Status pane displays information for the two basic
disk storage units and the two AdvancedDisk storage units that you configured
previously.

7 Briefly view the information displayed in the output of the Disk Storage Unit
Status report.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


176 B–172 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Configuring policies using the Create a Policy wizard to backup file systems
on Windows-based and UNIX or Linux-based clients
• View the characteristics of a policy used to perform simple file system backups
• Copy and modify policies used to perform simple file system backups using
the NetBackup Administration Console.

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience: B
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


177 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–173
Exercise 1: Configuring polices used to perform file system
backups

In this exercise, you configure policies used to perform file system backups of
Windows-based and UNIX or Linux-based client systems. To configure the
policies you use the Configure a Policy wizard that is provided in the NetBackup
Administration Console.

Configuring a policy to back up a Windows-based client


In the following steps, you use the Configure a Policy wizard to create a policy to
be used to back up files and directories of a Windows-based NetBackup client
system.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

Note: All NetBackup policies reside on the master server. Policies are created
using the NetBackup Administration Console that is connected to the
master server system.

2 Log on to the master server using the student user ID.

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, continue from the previous logged-in session.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

Note: A NetBackup Administration Console window may be open from the


previous lab exercise. If it is, use the open NetBackup Administration
Console window.

4 Click the top entry in the left pane of the NetBackup Administration
Console. This is the lnxmaster.example.com (Master Server) entry.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
178 B–174 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

5 Click the Create a Policy wizard.

The Backup Policy Configuration Wizard window is displayed.

6 Configure a policy using the information provided in the table. The


information in the table is presented in the order in which it is requested by the
Policy Creation Wizard.

Policy parameter Parameter value/settings


Create a policy for: File systems, databases, and applications
Policy name: winclient_test_wizard
Policy type: MS-Windows
Client Name: winclient.example.com
Client hardware and Windows-x64
Operating system Windows 2008
Backup Selections: G:\data\smallfiles
Backup Types: • Full Backup (default)
• Differential Incremental Backup (default)
Full backup frequency 1 Weeks (default wizard setting)
Full backup retention 2 weeks (default wizard setting)
Incremental frequency 1 Days (default wizard setting)
Incremental backup 2 weeks (default wizard setting)
retention B

Start Window Off hours (default wizard setting)


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6PM to 5AM daily (7 days per week)


Table 1: winclient_test_wizard policy parameters

Solution

a When the Policy Configuration Wizard prompts:

Create a backup policy for:


Click the File systems, databases, and applications radio button. (This is
the default selection.)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


179 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–175
b Click Next to continue.

The Policy name and Type screen is displayed.

c In the Policy name, enter winclient_test_wizard and in the Policy


type select MS-Windows as provided in Table 1.

d Click Next to continue.

The Client List screen is displayed.

e Click the Add button on the Client List screen.

The Add Client dialog box is displayed.

f In the Client name field, type winclient.example.com, and select


Windows-x64 Windows 2008 for Hardware and operating system, as
provided in Table 1.

g Click Add to add the name of the client to the Client List.

h Click Close to close the Add Client dialog box.

i Verify that the name of the client is displayed in the Client List.

j Click Next to continue.

The Backup Selections screen is displayed.

k Click the Add button.

l In the Backup Selection List, type G:\data\smallfiles and press


Enter.

m Verify that the Backup Selections screen contains the entry for
G:\data\smallfiles.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

n Click Next to continue.

The Backup Type screen is displayed.

o Accept the default backup types as indicated on the Backup Type screen.
The default backup types are Full Backup and Differential Incremental
Backup types.

p Click Next to continue.

The Rotation screen is displayed.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
180 B–176 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
q Accept the default frequency and retention settings for the policy. The
frequency and retention settings are listed in Table 1.

r Click Next to continue.

s The Start Window screen is displayed.

t Accept the default Off hours settings.

u Click Next to continue.

The Policy Configuration Wizard displays the message “A NetBackup


policy has been configured to back up files on the specified client
machines according to the schedules described on the previous
screens”.

v Click Finish to close the Policy Configuration Wizard.

End of Solution

7 When the wizard has completed the policy configuration the wizard displays
the dialog box with the question: Would you like to create another
NetBackup Policy?

8 Click Yes to create another policy using the information provided in the table.
This policy is used to backup a Linux-based NetBackup client system.

The information in the table is presented in the order in which it is requested by


the Policy Creation Wizard.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


181 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–177
Policy parameter Parameter value/settings
Create a policy for: File systems, databases, and applications
Policy name: lnxclient_test_wizard
Policy type: Standard
Client Name: lnxclient.example.com
Client hardware and Linux, RedHat2.6.18
Operating system
Backup Selections: /data/smallfiles
Backup Types: • Full Backup (default)
• Differential Incremental Backup (default)
Full backup frequency 1 Weeks (default wizard setting)
Full backup retention 2 weeks (default wizard setting)
Incremental frequency 1 Days (default wizard setting)
Incremental backup 2 weeks (default wizard setting)
retention
Start Window Off hours (default wizard setting)
6PM to 5AM daily (7 days per week)
Table 2: lnxclient_test_wizard policy parameter settings

Solution

a When the Policy Configuration Wizard prompts:

Create a backup policy for:


Click the File systems, databases, and applications radio button. (This is
the default selection.)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b Click Next to continue.

The Policy name and Type screen is displayed.

c In the Policy name, enter lnxclient_test_wizard and in the Policy


type select Standard as provided in Table 2.

d Click Next to continue.

The Client List screen is displayed.

e Click the Add button on the Client List screen.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


182 B–178 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Add Client dialog box is displayed.

f In the Client name field, type lnxclient.example.com, and select


Linux, RedHat2.6.18 for Hardware and operating system, as provided
in Table 2.

g Click Add to add the name of the client to the Client List.

h Click Close to close the Add Client dialog box.

i Verify that the name of the client is displayed in the Client List.

j Click Next to continue.

The Backup Selections screen is displayed.

k Click the Add button.

l In the Backup Selection List, type /data/smallfiles and press


Enter.

m Verify that the Backup Selections screen contains the entry for /data/
smallfiles.

n Click Next to continue.

The Backup Type screen is displayed.

o Accept the default backup types as indicated on the Backup Type screen.
The default backup types are Full Backup and Differential Incremental
Backup types.

p Click Next to continue.


B
The Rotation screen is displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

q Accept the default frequency and retention settings for the policy. The
frequency and retention settings are listed in Table 1.

r Click Next to continue.

s The Start Window screen is displayed.

t Accept the default Off hours settings.

u Click Next to continue.

The Policy Configuration Wizard displays the message “A NetBackup


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
183 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–179
policy has been configured to back up files on the specified client
machines according to the schedules described on the previous
screens”.

v Click Finish to close the Policy Configuration Wizard.

End of Solution

9 When prompted: “Would you like to create another NetBackup policy?”,


click No, to close the wizard.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


184 B–180 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 2: Viewing a policy used to perform file system backups

In this exercise, you view the characteristics of policies used to perform file system
backups of Windows-based and UNIX or Linux-based client systems. To view the
policies you use the NetBackup Administration Console.

Viewing a policy used to back up a UNIX or Linux-based client


In the following steps, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to view
the characteristics of the policy you created to back up files and directories of a
Linux-based NetBackup client system.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master


server.

2 Navigate and select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

3 The All Policies pane of the Administration Console lists all configured
policies.

4 Note the two policies that you configured in the previous exercise are listed in
the right pane of the Administration Console:
B
– lnxclient_test_wizard
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– winclient_test_wizard

5 Right-click the entry for the lnxclient_test_wizard policy.

6 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The lnxclient_test_wizard policy is displayed.

7 Note the four tabs of the policy:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


185 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–181
– Attributes
– Schedules
– Clients
– Backup Selections

The Attributes tab is selected by default when a policy is opened.

8 Note and record the following parameter settings on the Attributes tab:

Policy Attribute Parameter value/settings


Policy type: Standard
Policy storage: Any Available
Policy volume pool: NetBackup

Note: In the Attributes settings, you can see that policies created by the wizard
are generic. The destination storage unit for the policy is Any Available,
meaning that the backup image can be written to any configured storage
unit. If the backup is written to tape storage, the tape used is a member of
the NetBackup volume pool.

9 Click the Schedules tab.

10 Note the two schedules created by the wizard:

– Full
– Differential-Inc

11 Click the entry for the Full schedule, and then click the Change button.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

12 Briefly view the contents of the Full schedule. Note the three tabs of the
schedule:

– Attributes (of the schedule)


– Start Window
– Exclude Dates

13 Click Cancel to close the schedule without making changes to the schedule
configuration.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
186 B–182 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
14 Click the Clients tab of the policy.

15 Briefly view the contents of the Clients tab.

16 Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.

17 Briefly view the contents of the Backup Selections tab.

18 Click Close to close the lnxclient_test_wizard policy without making


changes to the policy.

Viewing a policy used to back up a Windows-based client

In the following steps, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to view
the characteristics of the policy you created to back up files and directories of a
Windows-based NetBackup client system.
The policies you created using the Policy Configuration Wizard are displayed in
the right pane of the Administration Console when you navigate to NetBackup
Management > Policies in the left pane of the Administration Console.

1 Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_wizard policy.

2 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The winclient_test_wizard policy is displayed.

3 Note the four tabs of the policy: B


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Attributes
– Schedules
– Clients
– Backup Selections

The Attributes tab is selected by default when a policy is opened.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


187 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–183
4 Note and record the following parameter settings on the Attributes tab:

Policy Attribute Parameter value/settings


Policy type: MS-Windows
Policy storage: Any Available
Policy volume pool: NetBackup

5 Click the Schedules tab.

6 Note the two schedules created by the wizard:

– Full
– Differential-Inc

7 Click the entry for the Full schedule, and then click the Change button.

8 Briefly view the contents of the Full schedule.

9 Click Cancel to close the schedule without making changes to the schedule
configuration.

10 Click the Clients tab of the policy.

11 Briefly view the contents of the Clients tab.

12 Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

13 Briefly view the contents of the Backup Selections tab.

14 Click Close to close the winclient_test_wizard policy without making


changes to the policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


188 B–184 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 3: Copying and modifying policies used for file system
backups

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to copy policies
and modify the policy copies to meet specific backup objectives.

Copying a backup policy to create a new policy


As you discovered in the previous exercise, the policies that are created using the
Policy Configuration Wizard are simple and generic. These policies are often not
detailed and specific enough to meet your backup requirements.
In the steps that follow, you copy a policy created using the wizard to create a new
policy. Later in this lab activity you modify the new policy to change key attributes
of the policy.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window.

2 Navigate to NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

All policies that exist are listed in the All Polices pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_wizard policy.

4 Click Copy to New option that is displayed in the resulting menu. B

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Type winclient_test_tape_master in the New policy field of the


Copy a Policy dialog box.

6 Click OK to copy the policy and close the Copy a Policy dialog box.

7 Note that the new winclient_test_tape_master policy is


immediately opened for editing.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


189 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–185
Note: At this point, the winclient_test_wizard policy and the
winclient_test_tape_master policy are identical.

Modifying a policy using the NetBackup Administration Console


In the steps that follow, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to make
simple modifications to a backup policy to match a set of requirements for backing
up a Windows-based client.
The winclient_test_tape_master policy is currently open in the
NetBackup Administration Console and is ready to be modified.
The winclient_test_tape_master policy must be modified to meet the
requirements described in the table.

Attributes:
• Backup images should be written to tape using the tape storage unit
associated with the master server, lnxmaster.example.com. The
name of the storage unit is tape_stu_lnxmaster.
• Backup images should be written to tape volumes that reside in the
server_tapes volume pool.
Schedules:
• The backup schedules should be modified so that no automatic
backups of the client are performed. Only manual backups of the client
files and directories can be performed using this policy. Clear the Start
Windows of the Full and Differential-Inc schedules to
disable automated backups using this policy.
Clients:
• winclient.example.com is the only client listed.
Backup Selections:
• In addition to the files and directories currently included for backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

using the policy, the G:\data\mixed should be included for backup


in the policy.
Table 3: winclient_test_tape_master policy modifications

8 Modify the winclient_test_tape_master policy using the


information provided in Table 3.

Solution

a Modify the settings on the policy’s Attributes tab:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


190 B–186 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
› Change the Policy storage attribute to point to the
tape_stu_lnxmaster storage unit.
› Change the Policy volume pool to the server_tapes.

b Click the Schedules tab.

c You are prompted: “You made changes to 1 or more policy attributes.


Before you exit this tab you changes should be saved.”

d Click Yes to save the changes.

The Schedules tab is displayed.

e Click the entry for the Full schedule and then click the Change button.

f Click the Start Window tab of the Full schedule.

g Click the Clear button. This removes all start windows from the schedule.

Note: With no Start Windows defined in a schedule only manual


backups using the schedule are enabled.

h Click OK to save the changes to the Full schedule.

i Click the entry for the Differential-Inc schedule on the Schedules tab,
then click the Change button.

j Click the Start Window tab of the Differential-Inc schedule.

k Edit the Start Window for the schedule to remove all Start Window
entries, enabling only manual backups using the schedule.
B
l Click OK to save the changes to the Differential-Inc schedule.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

m Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.

n Click the New button to add an entry to the Backup Selections list of the
policy.

The Add Backup Selection window is displayed.

o In the field Pathname or directive, type the entry shown below then click
Add.

G:\data\mixed

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


191 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–187
p Click OK to save the changes to the Add Backup Selection window
parameters.

q Verify that the Backup Selections tab of the policy now lists two entries:

› G:\data\smallfiles
› G:\data\mixed

r Click OK to save the changes to the policy.

The winclient_test_tape_master policy is saved and closed.


End of Solution

Note: The characteristics of the policy created in the previous steps are for
example purposes and are intended to provide practice using the
NetBackup Administration Console to make policy modifications. The
policy names and characteristics are not intended to represent specific
policy recommendations.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


192 B–188 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 4: Applying what you have learned

In this exercise, you apply what you have learned in this lesson to copy a policy to
create a new policy. Then, you modify the new policy to match a set of
requirements for the new policy that is used to back up specified files systems of a
Linux-based NetBackup client system.

Scenario
The lnxclient_test_wizard policy on the master server provides a general
framework for backing up a Linux-based client, but does not meet the specific
backup requirements for this scenario.
Your task is to create a copy of the lnxclient_test_wizard policy, and
modify the new policy to match the specified backup requirements.

Objectives and Requirements


The objectives for this exercise include:
• Copy an existing policy to create a new policy.
• Modify the new policy to match a set of backup objectives.
• Verify that the settings of the new policy match the parameters specified for the
policy in the table.

Create a new policy using the information provided in the table.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


193 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–189
Key Information
The table provides information relating to the configuration of the new policy that
you create during this lab exercise.

Name of policy to copy: lnxclient_test_wizard


Name of new policy: lnxclient_test_bdisk_media
Policy type: standard
Policy storage bdisk_stu_lnxmedia
Policy volume pool not applicable
All other policy attributes do not change
Full schedule frequency 4 weeks
Full schedule retention 3 months
Full schedule Start Window Saturday, 6AM-12PM
All other Full schedule parameters do not change
Differential-Inc schedule frequency 1 weeks
Differential-Inc schedule retention 1 month
Differential-Inc schedule Start Window Saturday, 6AM-12PM
All other Differential-Inc schedule do not change
parameters
Clients lnxclient.example.com
Backup Selections /data/smallfiles
/data/mixed
Table 4: lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy parameters

Procedure
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The following procedure describes the steps to copy a policy to a new policy and
to modify the new policy to match a set of requirements for the new policy, as
specified in the table.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Navigate to NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

All policies that exist are listed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


194 B–190 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
3 Copy the lnxclient_test_wizard policy to create a new policy named
lnxclient_test_bdisk_media.

Solution

a Right-click the entry for the lnxclient_test_wizard policy.

b Click Copy to New in the resulting menu.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

c Type lnxclient_test_bdisk_media in the New policy field of the


Copy a Policy dialog box.

d Click OK to copy the policy and close the Copy a Policy dialog box.

End of Solution

4 Note that the new lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy is


immediately opened for editing.

Note: At this point, the lnxclient_test_wizard policy and the


lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy are identical.

5 Modify the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy using the


information provided in the table.

Solution
B

a Modify the settings on the policy’s Attributes tab:


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Change the Policy storage attribute to point to the


bdisk_stu_lnxmedia storage unit.

b Click the Schedules tab.

c Click Yes to save changes.

d Click the entry for the Full schedule and then click the Change button.

e On the Attributes tab of the Full schedule:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


195 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–191
› Change the Frequency setting of the schedule to 4 weeks.
› Change the Retention setting for the schedule to 3 months (level 5).

f Click the Start Window tab of the Full schedule.

g Make the following changes in the Start Window tab.

› Click the Clear button. This removes all start windows from the
schedule.
› Click Sat (Saturday) in the Start day drop-down menu.
› Select 6:00:00 AM in the Start time field.
› Click Sat (Saturday) in the End day drop-down menu.
› Select 12:00:00 PM in the End time field.

h Click OK to save the changes to the Full schedule.

i Click the entry for the Differential-Inc schedule on the Schedules tab,
then click the Change button.

j On the Attributes tab of the Differential-Inc schedule:

Change the Frequency setting for the schedule to 1 week.


Change the Retention setting for the schedule to 1 month.

k Click the Start Window tab of the Differential-Inc schedule.

l Make the following changes in the Start Window tab.

› Click the Clear button. This removes all start windows from the
schedule.
› Click Sat (Saturday) in the Start day drop-down menu.
› Select 6:00:00 AM in the Start time field.
› Click Sat (Saturday) in the End day drop-down menu.
› Select 12:00:00 PM in the End time field.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

m Click OK to save the changes to the Differential-Inc schedule.

n Verify the contents of the Clients tab. The only client backed up by the
policy is lnxclient.example.com.

o Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.

p Add an entry to the Backup Selections tab.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


196 B–192 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
› Click the New button to add an entry to the Backup Selections list of
the policy.
› In the field Pathname or directive, type the entry shown below then
click OK to save the new backup selection entry.
/data/mixed

q Briefly view the contents of the Attributes, Schedules, Clients, and


Backup Selections tabs to verify that the policy settings match the settings
specified in the table.

r Click OK to save the changes to the policy.

The lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy is closed.


End of Solution

6 Verify that the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy is listed in the


policy list in the right pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

Verify the Solution


You have successfully completed this exercise when you have verified the creation
of the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy and have verified that the
policy settings match the criteria specified for the policy as specified in the table
for this exercise.

End of lab

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


197 Lab 6: Configuring File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–193
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


198 B–194 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Initiating manual backups using the NetBackup Administration Console
• Using the NetBackup Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of backup jobs
• Performing file system restore operations using the Backup, Archive, and
Restore (BAR) GUI
– Restoring files to their original folder location on the client
– Restoring files to an alternate folder location on the original client
– Restoring files to an alternate Windows-based client system
– Restoring files to a Linux-based client system
• Using the View Status interface of the Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

GUI to view the status of restore operations


• Using the NetBackup Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of restore jobs
• Performing file system restore operations using the OpsCenter operational
restore interface. B

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
199 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–195
Exercise 1: Initiating manual backups using the NetBackup
Administration Console

In this lab exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to initiate
manual backups using the policies configured in the previous lab activity.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the NetBackup Administration Console.

Note: You can launch the NetBackup Administration Console by executing the
jnbSA& command in a terminal window on the master server system.

3 Navigate to NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

Performing a manual backup of a Windows-based client


In the steps that follow, you perform the manual backup of a Windows-based client
system. You initiate the backup job using the NetBackup Administration
Console.

4 Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_wizard policy, located in


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the All Policies pane of the Administration Console.

5 Click Manual Backup in the resulting menu.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


200 B–196 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
6 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com using the Full
schedule.

Solution

a Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Schedules pane.

Note: There is no need to select the entry for a client because there is only
one client listed in the Clients pane of the Manual Backup dialog
box.

b Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

Monitoring the backup job

7 Access the Activity Monitor to view the progress of the resulting backup job.

Solution
Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.
End of Solution

Note: If Jobs are not displayed, click the Jobs tab at the bottom of the Activity
Monitor pane.

8 How many jobs are displayed in the Activity Monitor?


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

How many jobs Answers may vary. It is expected that only a single
are displayed? job entry exists in the Activity Monitor.
B

Note: The number of jobs displayed in the Activity monitor may vary. The
winclient_test_wizard and lnxclient_test_wizard
policies enable scheduled (automatic) backups. Depending upon the time

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


201 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–197
of day that these policies were created, automated backups of these policies
may have already been performed, and the resulting jobs would be
displayed in the Activity Monitor.

9 Wait until the State of the most recent job (job with the highest numbered Job
ID) is Done, then go to the next step.

10 Record the information about the job that has the highest numbered Job ID
(the job that has run most recently).

Job ID: Answers may vary.


Type: Backup
Status: Expect status 0. Answers may vary.
Job Policy winclient_test_wizard
Client winclient.example.com
Media Server: Answers may vary. The storage unit for the policy
used is ‘Any available’.
Storage Unit Answers may vary. The storage unit for the policy
used is ‘Any available’.

11 Right-click the entry for the most recent job listed in the Activity Monitor (the
job that has the highest numbered Job ID) and select Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

12 Note there are two tabs available for selection in the Job Details window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Job Overview
– Detailed Status

13 Briefly view the information available on the Job Overview tab.

14 Record the contents of the Status field pane on the Job Overview tab.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


202 B–198 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Status: Answers may vary.
It is expected that the message “1: (0) the requested
operations was successfully completed” is displayed.

15 If the job failed, note the status code for the failed job and notify your
instructor.

16 Click the Detailed Status tab.

17 Briefly view the information available on the Detailed Status tab.

18 Click Close to close the Job Details window.

Performing a manual backup of a Linux-based client


In the steps that follow, you perform the manual backup of a Linux-based client
system. You initiate the backup job using the NetBackup Administration
Console.

1 Navigate to NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

2 Right-click the entry for the lnxclient_test_wizard policy, located in


the All Policies pane of the Administration Console.

3 Click Manual Backup in the resulting menu.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Perform a manual backup of lnxclient.example.com using the Full


schedule. B

Solution

a Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Schedules pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


203 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–199
Note: There is no need to select the entry for a client because there is only
one client listed in the Clients pane of the Manual Backup dialog
box.

b Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

Monitoring the backup job


In the steps that follow, you use the Activity Monitor to view the progress of the
backup job.

5 Access the Activity Monitor to view the progress of the resulting backup job.

Solution
Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.
End of Solution

6 Click the heading of the Job ID column in the Activity Monitor.

Note: Clicking the heading of a column in the Activity Monitor changes the sort
order of the jobs listed in the Activity Monitor. For example, when you
click the Job ID column heading one time, the jobs are listed from lowest
numbered Job ID to the highest numbered Job ID (ascending order). When
you click the Job ID column heading again, the jobs are listed from the
highest number Job ID to lowest numbered Job ID (descending order).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

7 Click the heading of the Job ID column repeatedly, until the jobs are listed in
descending order, with the highest numbered Job ID (the most recent job)
listed at the top of the Job ID list.

8 Wait until the State of the most recent job (job with the highest numbered Job
ID) is Done, then go to the next step.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


204 B–200 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
9 Record the information about the job that has the highest numbered Job ID
(the job that has run most recently).

Job ID: Answers may vary.


Type: Backup
Status: Expect status 0. Answers may vary.
Job Policy lnxclient_test_wizard
Client lnxclient.example.com
Media Server: Answers may vary. The storage unit for the policy
used is ‘Any available’.
Storage Unit Answers may vary. The storage unit for the policy
used is ‘Any available’.

10 Right-click the entry for the most recent job listed in the Activity Monitor (the
job that has the highest numbered Job ID) and select Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

Note: You can access the Job Details for a job by clicking the entry for the job,
and then selecting Actions > Details, or by clicking the Details icon on the
Activity Monitor tool bar.

11 Briefly view the information available on the Job Overview tab for the job.

12 Record the contents of the Status field pane on the Job Overview tab.

Status: Answers may vary.


It is expected that the message “1: (0) the requested
operations was successfully completed” is displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

13 If the job failed, note the status code for the failed job and notify your
B
instructor.

14 Click the Detailed Status tab.

15 Briefly view the information available on the Detailed Status tab.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


205 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–201
16 Click Close to close the Job Details window.

Performing additional manual backup jobs


In the steps that follow, you perform additional manual backups of Windows-based
and Linux-based client systems. You initiate the backup jobs using the NetBackup
Administration Console.

1 Navigate to NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

2 Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_master policy,


located in the All Policies pane of the Administration Console.

3 Click Manual Backup in the resulting menu.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

4 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com using the Full


schedule.

Solution

a Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Schedules pane.

b Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

5 Right-click the entry for the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 Click Manual Backup in the resulting menu.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


206 B–202 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Perform a manual backup of lnxclient.example.com using the Full
schedule.

Solution

a Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Schedules pane.

b Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

Viewing and monitoring results of the backup jobs


In the steps that follow, you use the Activity Monitor to view the progress of
backup jobs.

1 Access the Activity Monitor to view the progress of the most recently
initiated backup jobs.
Solution
Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.
End of Solution

2 Wait until the Job State of the most recent job (job with the highest numbered
Job ID) is Done, then go to the next step.

3 Locate the entry for the job that was used to back up the client,
winclient.example.com, using the
winclient_test_tape_master policy.

Record the information about that job in the space provided.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Job ID: Answers may vary.


Job Type: Backup B

Job Status: Expect status 0. Answers may vary.


Job Policy winclient_test_tape_master
Client winclient.example.com
Media Server: lnxmaster.example.com
Storage Unit tape_stu_lnxmaster

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


207 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–203
4 Right-click the entry for the job you identified in the previous step (the job that
was used to back up winclient.example.com using the
winclient_test_tape_master policy) and select Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

5 Briefly view the information available on the Job Overview tab for the job.

6 Record the contents of the Status field pane on the Job Overview tab.

Status: Answers may vary.


It is expected that the message “1: (0) the requested
operations was successfully completed” is displayed.

7 If the job failed, note the status code for the failed job and notify your
instructor.

8 Click the Detailed Status tab.

9 View the contents of the Status pane on the Detailed Status tab.

10 Locate and record the Media ID of the tape that was used to perform the
backup job. The Media ID is included in an entry in the Status pane that has
the message format:

“mm/dd/yy HH:mm:ss AM/PM - granted resource media ID”.

Media ID used: Answers may vary.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Click Close to close the Job Details window for the job.

12 Locate the entry for the Job ID of the job that was used to back up
lnxclient.example.com using the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


208 B–204 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Record the information about that job in the space provided.

Job ID: Answers may vary.


Type: Backup
Status: Expect status 0. Answers may vary.
Job Policy lnxclient_test_bdisk_media
Client lnxclient.example.com
Media Server: lnxmedia.example.com
Storage Unit bdisk_stu_lnxmedia

13 Right-click the entry for the job you identified in the previous step (the job that
was used to back up lnxclient.example.com using the
lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy) and select Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

14 Briefly view the information available on the Job Overview tab for the job.

15 Record the contents of the Status field pane on the Job Overview tab.

Status: Answers may vary.


It is expected that the message 1: (0) “the requested
operations was successfully completed” is displayed.

16 If the job failed, note the status code for the failed job and notify your
instructor.

17 Click the Detailed Status tab.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

18 View the contents of the Status pane on the Detailed Status tab.

B
19 Locate and record the disk path information to which the backup image was
written during the backup job. The drive and path information is included in an
entry in the Status pane that has the message format:

“mm/dd/yy HH:mm:ss AM/PM - granted resource MediaID=@aaaap;


Path=directory; MediaServer=media_server_name”.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


209 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–205
Drive:directory: /bdisk_stu

20 Click Close to close the Job Details window for the job.

You perform numerous manual backup operations and use the Activity
Monitor throughout the remainder of this course.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


210 B–206 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 2: Using the BAR GUI to perform file system restores to
the original folder location on the client

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR)
client user interface to restore client files for a Windows-based client to their
original folder location on the client system.

1 Access the console of your master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master


server system.

3 Right-click Backup, Archive, and Restore entry in the left pane of the
Administration Console, and then click New Window from Here, to launch
the Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR) GUI in a separate window.

The Backup, Archive, and Restore is opened in a separate window.

Note: To better utilize the screen real estate of the BAR GUI window, you can
collapse the left pane of the Administration Console, so that the BAR GUI
occupies the entire window.

Using the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI


In the following steps, you look at basic settings of the Backup, Archive, and
Restore GUI.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Note the three main tabs located across the top of the of the Backup, Archive,
and Restore GUI:
B
– Backup Files
– Restore Files
– Task Progress

5 Select Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


211 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–207
The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is displayed.

6 Enter the information in the fields of the Specify NetBackup Machines and
Policy Type window, as indicated in the table.

Server to use for backups and restores: lnxmaster.example.com


Source client for restores: winclient.example.com
Destination client for restores winclient.example.com
Policy type for restores: MS-Windows
Table 1: Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type settings

Solution

a Select lnxmaster.example.com from the drop-down list of the


Server to use for backups and restores field, as indicated in the table.

b Click the Browse button for the Source client for restores field and select
winclient.example.com, as specified in the table. Click OK.

c After selecting the name of the source client, click OK to close the Browse
Client List window.

d Click the Browse button for the Destination client for restores field and
select winclient.example.com, as specified in the table. Click OK.

e Select MS-Windows from the Policy type for restores drop-down list, as
indicated in the table.

f Click OK to save the changes to the Specify NetBackup Machines and


Policy Type window parameter settings.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is closed.


End of Solution

Note: In general, NetBackup clients are allowed only to browse backup images
and perform the restore of data that was backed up from their own system.
For example, NetBackup users on winclient.example.com can only
browse for and select for restore from backup images created from
winclient.example.com resident data. In contrast, NetBackup

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


212 B–208 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
administrative users running the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI on
the master server system can browse for and restore data to any client in the
NetBackup domain of the master server.

7 Click the Restore Files tab on the BAR GUI.

8 If a NetBackup Message dialog box is displayed containing a message


containing a WARNING about the master server not containing backups for
the specified client, the parameters of the Specify NetBackup Client
Machines and Policy Type have not been set according to the settings
indicated in the previous table. Take the following steps:

– Click OK to acknowledge the warning.


– Repeat the step to set the Specify NetBackup Client Machines and
Policy Type settings to those indicated in the table.
– Save the Specify NetBackup Client Machines and Policy Type settings.

If the Specify NetBackup Client Machines and Policy Type settings have
been properly set, when the Restore Files tab is selected, the client makes a
request to the master server to the display backup images created by backups
of the specified source client (as specified by the Source client for restores
parameter).

9 Note the contents of the Directory Structure pane of the BAR GUI should
display files and directories of the specified client. The files and directories
that are displayed are derived from backup images of the client data.

10 Click View > Show All Backups. Note that when this option is selected, the
Contents of the selected directory pane shows entries for all backups of
client data that occurred in the specified date range.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Click View > Show Most Recent Backup. Note that when this option is
selected, the Contents of the selected directory pane shows only the entry for
the most recent backup image of client data that occurred in the specified date B
range.

12 Hover with your mouse over the icons on the BAR GUI to identify the function
available:

– Use Calendar to set date range


– Use Backup History to set date range
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
213 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–209
– Show most recent backup in the specified date range
– Show all backup in the specified date range
– Refresh the list for the selected directory
– Find items to restore

13 Verify that View >Show Most Recent Backup is selected.

14 Click the arrow for the drop-down list of the Restore Type field.

15 Note the Restore Types listed in the drop-down menu:

– Normal Backups
– Archived Backups
– Raw Partition Backups
– True Image Backups
– Backup Exec Backups
– Point in Time Rollback Backups
– Virtual Machine Backup

16 Select Normal Backups in the drop-down list (Normal Backups is the default
selection)

Performing a restore operation to a Windows-based client


In the following steps, you perform a restore of file system data to a Windows-
based client.

1 The Browse Directory pane of the BAR GUI displays the Directory
Structure included in the most recent backup of the specified client.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for winclient.example.com that is
displayed in the Directory Structure pane, to expand that entry.

3 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the G (disk drive) that is displayed
in the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the drive. Do not
check the box for the G drive.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


214 B–210 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
4 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the data folder that is displayed in
the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the folder. Do not check
the box for the data folder.

5 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the mixed folder that is displayed
in the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the folder. Do not
check the box for the mixed folder.

6 Click the mixed folder that is displayed in the Directory Structure pane. Do
not check the box for the mixed folder.

The folders and files that were included in the backup image for the
G:\data\mixed folder are displayed in the Contents of selected directory
pane of the BAR GUI.

7 Allow the BAR GUI window to remain open on the master server system. You
return to this window in a few moments.

Preparing the client for the restore operation


In the following steps, you view the existing folders on the client system to prepare
for the restore of client files.

8 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

9 Log on to the client system using the student user ID.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system and select
Open. B

11 Navigate to G:\data\mixed in the Computer window.

12 Right-click the entry for the datasheet-netbackup.pdf file.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


215 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–211
13 Click Delete in the resulting menu.

14 Click Yes in the Delete File dialog box to confirm your command and move
the file to the recycle bin.

15 Verify that the datasheet-netbackup.pdf file has been deleted from


the G:\data\mixed folder.

16 Allow the Computer window to remain open, and the contents of the
G:\data\mixed folder to be displayed. You return to the client system in a
few moments.

Restoring the deleted file


In the steps that follow, you restore the deleted file to its original folder location on
the client system.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

2 Access the BAR GUI on the master server system. The BAR GUI was left
open in a previous step of this exercise.

3 Click the box to the left of the datasheet-netbackup.pdf file in the


Content of selected directory pane of the BAR GUI.

You have selected the datasheet-netbackup.pdf file for restore.

4 Click the Preview button to preview the media required for the restore
operation.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Media Required window is displayed.

5 What media is required to perform the restore operation?

Media Required: The media ID required for the restore may vary. The
backup job that created the backup image selected
for restore should have been written to a tape
volume.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


216 B–212 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
6 Click OK to close the Media Required window.

7 Click the Restore button.

The Restore Marked Files window is displayed.

8 Select the options and parameters in the Restore Marked Files window to
restore the selected file to its original folder location on the client system (from
which it was backed up).

Solution
Accept all the default settings in the Restore Marked Files window.
End of Solution

9 Click Start Restore in the Restore Marked Files window.

A View Progress dialog box is displayed with the question “Do you want to
view the progress of the restore?”

10 Click Yes in the View Progress dialog box.

The Task Progress tab is selected and displayed.


The Tasks Performed window displays a list of the user jobs that have been
initiated from the BAR GUI of the system. Currently a single Restore entry
should be displayed.

11 Click the entry for the Restore operation that is displayed in the top pane of the
View Status window.

The status of the selected operation is displayed on the bottom half of the Task
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Progress window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


217 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–213
12 Use the contents of the Results of the Task Selected Above window answer
the questions. Click the Full Contents box to obtain more detailed information
about the restore operation.

Was the restore job successful? Your answers may vary. It is


expected that the restore job was
successful.
What media was used for the Your answers may vary. The most
restore operation? recent backup image should have
been written to a tape volume.
How many files were restored? 1 file was restored, according to the
Progress pane of the View Status
window.

Verify the restore of the client file


In the steps that follow, you verify that the file that was previously deleted from the
client has been restored to its original folder location.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

2 Access the Computer window on the client system. This window is open from
previous steps in this lab exercise.

3 Navigate to the G:\data\mixed folder in the Computer window.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Refresh the contents of the Computer window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


218 B–214 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 Is the datasheet-netbackup.pdf file present in the G:\data\mixed
folder?

Answer: Your answer may vary. It is expected that the restore job
was successful, and that the file has been restored to the
G:\data\mixed folder.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


219 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–215
Exercise 3: Using the BAR GUI to perform a file system restore to
an alternate folder location on the client

In this exercise, you use the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI to restore files
from a backup image of a Windows-based client to an alternate folder location on
the client system.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR) GUI on your master server
system.

3 Click the Restore Files tab on the BAR GUI.

4 Locate and click the icon for Use Backup History to set date range on the
BAR GUI.

5 When the Backup History pane is displayed, click the entry for the most
recent Full Backup that used the winclient_test_tape_master
policy.

6 Click OK to close the Backup History window.

7 The contents of the selected backup image are displayed in the Directory
Structure pane in the BAR GUI.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for winclient.example.com


that is displayed in the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the
client system.

9 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the G drive that is displayed in the
Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the disk volume.

10 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the data folder that is displayed in
the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the folder.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
220 B–216 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
11 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the mixed folder that is displayed
in the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the folder.

12 Click the entry for the mixed folder that is displayed in the Directory
Structure pane.

The folders and files that were included in the backup image for the mixed
folder are displayed in the Contents of selected directory pane of the BAR
GUI.

13 Click the check box to the left of the mixed folder that is displayed in the
Directory Structure pane, so that the folder is marked for restore.

The folders and files present in the G:\data\mixed folder are all marked
for restore, as displayed in the Contents of selected directory pane of the
BAR GUI.

14 Allow the BAR GUI window to remain open on the master server system. You
return to this window in a few moments.

Preparing the client for the restore operation


In the following steps, you view the folders on the client system to prepare for the
restore of client folders and files.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system and select
Open.

B
3 Navigate to G: in the Computer window.

4 Note that the data folder is currently the only folder present in G:\.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


221 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–217
5 Allow the Computer window to remain open, and the contents of the G:\
folder to be displayed. You use this window later in this exercise.

Restoring the client folders and files


In the steps that follow, you perform the final steps to restore the folder and files to
the alternate folder location on the client system.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the BAR GUI on the master server system. The BAR GUI was left
open in a previous step of this exercise.

In a previous step you selected the G:\data\mixed folder and its contents
for restore.

3 Verify that the G:\data\mixed folder and its contents are marked for
restore.

4 Click the Preview button to preview the media required for the restore
operation.

The Media Required window is displayed.

5 What media is required to perform the restore operation?

Media Required. The media ID required for the restore may vary. The
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

backup job that created the backup image selected


for restore should have been written to a tape
volume.

6 Click OK to close the Media Required window.

7 Click the Restore button.

The Restore Marked Files window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


222 B–218 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
8 Select the options and parameters in the Restore Marked Files window to
restore the selected folders and files to the alternate folder location on the
client system: G:\alt-directory\mixed.

Solution

a Click the Restore Everything to a different location (maintaining


existing structure) radio button.

b In the entry field directly below the radio button, type the following entry:

G:\alt-directory\mixed

c Allow all other parameters in the Restore Marked Files window to remain
at their default settings.

End of Solution

9 Click Start Restore in the Restore Marked Files window.

A View Progress dialog box is displayed with the question “Do you want to
view the progress of the restore?”

10 Click Yes in the View Progress dialog box.

The Task Progress tab is automatically selected.


The top pane of the Task Progress tab displays a list of the user jobs that have
been initiated from the BAR GUI of the system.

11 Click the entry for the most recent Restore operation that is displayed in the
top pane of the Task Progress window. (You can sort the order in which the
tasks are listed.)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The status of the selected operation is displayed on the bottom half of the Task
Progress window.
B

12 Click the Full Contents check box to display more detailed information in the
Results pane of the Task Progress window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


223 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–219
13 Use the contents of the Task Progress window and the status information for
the restore job to answer the questions.

Was the restore job successful? Your answers may vary. It is


expected that the restore job was
successful.
What media was used for the Your answers may vary. The most
restore operation? recent backup image should have
been written to a tape volume.
How many files were restored? 28 of 28 file were restored
successfully, according to the
Progress pane of the View Status
window.

Verifying the restore of the client files


In the steps that follow, you verify that the folders and files have been restored to
the specified alternate folder location on the client system.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

2 Access the Computer window on the client system. This window is open from
previous steps in this lab exercise.

3 Navigate to the G:\ folder in the Computer window.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Refresh the contents of the Computer window.

5 Is the alt-directory folder present on the G:\ drive?

Answer: Your answer may vary. It is expected that the restore job
was successful, and that the G:\alt-directory
folder has been created.

6 Right-click the G:\alt-directory folder and select Open.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


224 B–220 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Note that the G:\alt-directory folder contains a mixed sub-folder.

8 Right-click the G:\alt-directory\mixed folder and select Open.

9 Note that the folder and file contents of the G:\data\mixed folder have
been restored to the G:\alt-directory\mixed folder.

Compare the contents of the G:\data\mixed and the G:\alt-


directory\mixed folders to verify that the restore of data to an alternate
folder location was successfully completed.

Note: If the contents of the G:\data\mixed and the G:\alt-


directory\mixed folders are not the same, review the steps for
restoring the selected files and folders to an alternate folder location.
Notify your instructor if problems persist.

10 Close the Computer window on the client system.

In this exercise, you restore files from a backup image of a Windows-based client
Exercise 4: Using the BAR GUI to perform a file system restore to
an alternate Windows-based client system

to a folder location on an alternate Windows-based client system.

Verifying files and directories on the alternate client system


In the steps that follow, you view the folders on the designated alternate Windows-
based client system to prepare for the restore of client data.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Access the console of the Windows-based client system,


winserver.example.com.

winserver

2 Log on to the system using the student user ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


225 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–221
3 Right-click the Computer icon on the winserver.example.com
desktop and select Open.

4 Right-click the entry for the G:\ drive and select Open to view the contents of
the disk volume.

5 Note that the only folder that is present on the G:\ drive is the G:\data
folder.

6 Allow the Computer window to remain open on the client,


winserver.example.com. You return to this window in a few moments.

Changing the destination client for a restore


In the steps that follow, you alter the Destination client for restores setting in the
Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI to prepare for performing a file system restore
to an alternate Windows-based client system.

7 Access the console of the master server system.

8 Access the Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR) GUI.

lnxmaster

The BAR GUI window is open from the restore operation that you performed
in the exercise.

9 Click the Restore Files tab.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Select Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type to change
the Destination client for restores setting, to designate the client,
winserver.example.com, as the destination client for the next restore
operation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


226 B–222 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is displayed.
Solution

a Do not change the contents of the Server to use for backups and restores
field.

b Do not change the contents of the Source client for restores field.

c Type the client name, winserver.example.com, in the Destination


client for restores field of the Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type window. This client system is the destination client for the next
restore operation.

d Do not change the contents of the Policy type for restores field.

e Click OK to save the changes to the Specify NetBackup Machines and


Policy Type window parameter settings.

The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is closed.


End of Solution

11 After changing the settings in the Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type window, note that the bar of the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI
displays the current Restore Server, Source Client, and Destination Client
settings, as shown in the screen shot.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

B
Note: The key to performing an alternate client restore is to change the
Destination client for restores setting (which requires NetBackup
Administrative privilages) in Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type of the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


227 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–223
Performing the restore operation
In the steps that follow, you perform the steps to complete the restore of the
specified client files to an alternate Windows-based client system. When
performing this restore you also specify that the folders and files are restored to an
alternate folder location on the target client (to a different folder location than the
files originated from on the source client).

1 Access the Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR) GUI.


In the BAR GUI the G:\data\mixed folder and its contents remain marked
for restore from the restore operation performed in the previous exercise.

In the following steps, you restore the G:\data\mixed folder and its
contents to a directory on the Windows-based client,
winserver.example.com.

2 Click the Restore button on the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

The Restore Marked Files window is displayed.

3 Select the options and parameters in the Restore Marked Files window to
restore the selected folders and files to the destination client system and to the
alternate folder location: G:\alt-client\winclient\mixed.

Solution

a Click the Restore Everything to a different location (maintaining


existing structure) radio button.

b In the entry field directly below the radio button, type the following entry:

G:\alt-client\winclient\mixed
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

c Allow all other parameters in the Restore Marked Files window to remain
at their default settings.

End of Solution

4 Click Start Restore in the Restore Marked Files window.

A View Progress dialog box is displayed with the question “Do you want to
view the progress of the restore?”

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


228 B–224 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 Click Yes in the View Progress dialog box.

The Task Progress tab is automatically selected.


The top pane of the Task Progress tab displays a list of the user jobs that have
been initiated from the BAR GUI of the system.

6 Click the entry for the most recent Restore operation that is displayed in the
top pane of the Task Progress window. (You can sort the order in which the
tasks are listed.)

The status of the selected operation is displayed on the bottom half of the Task
Progress window.

7 Click the Full Contents check box to display more detailed information in the
Results pane of the Task Progress window.

8 Use the contents of the Task Progress window and the status information for
the restore job to answer the questions.

What is the host name of the client winserver.example.com


to which the files are restored?
Was the restore job successful? Your answers may vary. It is
expected that the restore job was
successful.
What media was used for the Your answers may vary. The most
restore operation? recent backup image should have
been written to a tape volume.
How many files were restored? 28 of 28 file were restored
successfully, according to the
Progress pane of the View Status
window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Verifying the restore of the client files B

In the steps that follow, you verify the restore of the client files to the alternate
Windows-based client system.

1 Access the console of the client system, winserver.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


229 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–225
winserver

2 Access the Computer window that is open from a previous step in this
exercise.

3 Right-click the entry for the G:\ folder and select Open.

4 Is the alt-client folder present on the G:\ drive?

Answer: Your answer may vary. It is expected that the restore job
was successful, and that the G:\alt-client folder
has been created on the client system.

5 Right-click the G:\alt-client folder and select Open.

6 Note that the G:\alt-client folder contains winclient sub-folder.

7 Right-click the G:\alt-client\winclient folder and select Open.

8 Note that the G:\alt-client\winclient folder contains a mixed sub-


folder.

9 Right-click the G:\alt-client\winclient\mixed folder and select


Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Briefly compare the G:\alt-client\winclient\mixed folder


contents on winserver.example.com to the contents of the
G:\data\mixed folder on winclient.example.com.

Record your observations:

Observations: The contents of the two folders should be identical


because the restore operation restored the contents of the
backup image created of the folder on
winclient.example.com was restored to the
folder on winserver.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


230 B–226 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
11 Close the Computer window on winserver.example.com.

12 Close the Computer window on winclient.example.com.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


231 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–227
Exercise 5: Using the BAR GUI to perform a file system restore to a
Linux-based client system

In this exercise, you restore files from a backup image of a Linux-based client to
an alternate directory location on the client system.

Verifying directories and files on the Linux-based client system


In the steps that follow, you view the folders on the Linux-based client system to
prepare for the restore of client data.

1 Access the console of the Linux-based client system,


lnxclient.example.com.

lnxclient

2 Log in to the client system using the student user ID.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the lnxclient.example.com


desktop and select Open.

4 Right-click the Filesystem entry and select Open.

5 Click the expand icon for the /data directory.

Note: You can change the view of files and directories displayed in the window
by accessing the View menu and selecting the desired view (Icons, List,
Compact).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 Note that sub-directories listed in the /data directory:

– big
– complex
– lost+found
– mixed
– simple

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


232 B–228 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
– smallfiles

7 Allow the Computer window to remain open on the client,


lnxclient.example.com. You return to this window in a few moments.

Changing the source and destination clients for a restore


In the steps that follow, you alter the Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type settings in the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI to prepare for performing
a file system restore to the Linux-based client system,
lnxclient.example.com.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the Backup, Archive, and Restore (BAR) GUI.

The BAR GUI window is open from the restore operation that you performed
in the exercise.

3 Click the Restore Files tab.

4 Select Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type.

The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is displayed.

5 Change the Source client for restores, Destination client for restores, and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Policy type for restores parameters of the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI
to the following settings:

– Source client for restores: lnxclient.example.com B


– Destination client for restores: lnxclient.example.com
– Policy type for restores: Standard

Solution

a Change the Source client for restores field to point to the client,
lnxclient.example.com.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
233 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–229
b Change the Destination client for restores field to point to the client,
lnxclient.example.com.

c Change the Policy Type for restores field to Standard.

d Click OK to save the changes to the Specify NetBackup Machines and


Policy Type window parameter settings.

The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is closed.


End of Solution

6 After changing the settings in the Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type window, note that the bar of the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI
displays the current Restore Server, Source Client, and Destination Client.

Note: If you do not change the Policy Type specified to match the Policy Type
used to backup the selected Source client for restores setting, when
NetBackup browses for backup images for the client (initiated by clicking
Restore Files tab) it will post a message indicating that it is unable to
locate backup images for that client system.

7 Locate and click the icon for Use Backup History to set date range on he
BAR GUI.

8 When the Backup History pane is displayed, click the entry for the most
recent Full Backup that used the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media
policy.

9 Click OK to close the Backup History window.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 The contents of the selected backup image are displayed in the Directory
Structure pane in the BAR GUI.

11 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the / directory that is displayed in
the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the directory.

12 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the data directory that is
displayed in the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the
directory.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


234 B–230 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
13 Click the symbol to the left of the entry for the mixed directory that is
displayed in the Directory Structure pane, to expand the entry for the
directory

14 Click the entry for the mixed directory that is displayed in the Directory
Structure pane.

The folders and files that were included in the backup image for the mixed
directory are displayed in the Contents of selected directory pane of the BAR
GUI.

15 Click the check box to the left of the mixed directory that is displayed in the
Directory Structure pane, so that the directory is marked for restore.

The directories and files present in the /data/mixed directory are all
marked for restore, as displayed in the Contents of selected directory pane of
the BAR GUI.

Restoring the client folders and files


In the steps that follow, you perform the final steps to restore the selected directory
and files to the Linux-based client system and to an alternate directory location on
the client: /data/alt-directory.

lnxmaster

1 Access the BAR GUI on the master server system.


In a previous step you selected the mixed folder and its contents for restore.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Verify that the mixed folder and its contents are marked for restore.

3 Click the Preview button to preview the media required for the restore B
operation.

A Media Required dialog box is displayed indicating that the “No media
required for restore. Images are on disk”.

4 Click OK to close the Media Required dialog box.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


235 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–231
5 Click the Restore button.

The Restore Marked Files window is displayed.

6 Select the options and parameters in the Restore Marked Files window to
restore the selected directories and files to the specified alternate directory
location on the client system: /data/alt-directory/mixed.

Solution

a Click the Restore everything to a different location (maintaining the


existing structure) radio button.

b In the Destination field directly below the radio button, type the file path
to the destination folder: /data/alt-directory/mixed.

End of Solution

7 Click Start Restore in the Restore Marked Files window.

A View Progress dialog box is displayed with the question “Do you want to
view the progress of the restore?”

8 Click Yes in the View Progress dialog box.

The Task Progress tab is automatically selected.


The top pane of the Task Progress tab displays a list of the user jobs that have
been initiated from the BAR GUI of the system.

9 Click the entry for the most recent Restore operation that is displayed in the
top pane of the Task Progress tab.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The status of the selected operation is displayed on the bottom half of the Task
Progress window.

10 Click the Full Contents check box to display more detailed information in the
Progress pane of the Task Progress window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


236 B–232 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
11 Use the contents of the Task Progress window and its Results pane to answer
the questions about the restore job.

What is the host name of the client lnxclient.example.com


to which the files are restored?
Was the restore job successful? Your answers may vary. It is
expected that the restore job was
successful.
What media was used for the Your answers may vary. The most
restore operation? recent backup image for the client
should have been written to an
AdvancedDisk storage unit. The
Progress pane does not identify the
media used for a restore operation
that obtains the restore data from
disk-based storage.
How many files were restored? 27 of 27 file were restored
successfully, according to the
Progress pane of the View Status
window.

12 Close the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI window on the master server
system (File > Close).

Verifying the restore of the client files


In the steps that follow, you verify that the folders and files have been restored to
the specified alternate folder location on the Linux-based client system,
lnxclient.example.com.

1 Access the console of the client system, lnxclient.example.com.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxclient
B

2 Access the Computer window on the client system. This window is open from
previous steps in this lab exercise.

3 Navigate to the /data folder in the Computer window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


237 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–233
4 Refresh the contents of the Computer window.

5 Is the data/alt-directory folder present on the client system?

Answer: Your answer may vary. It is expected that the restore job
was successful, and that the /data/alt-directory
folder has been created.

6 Click the expand icon for the /data/alt-directory to display the


contents of the directory.

7 Note that the /data/alt-directory folder contains a mixed sub-


directory.

8 Click the expand icon for the /data/alt-directory/mixed directory


to open the directory.

9 Note that the directory and file contents of the /data/mixed directory have
been restored to the /data/alt-directory/mixed directory on the
client system.

Compare the contents of the /data/mixed and the /data/alt-


directory/mixed directories to verify that the restore of data to an
alternate folder location on the Linux-based client was successfully completed.

10 Close any Computer windows that are open on the client system.

Viewing restore jobs in the NetBackup Activity Monitor


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

In the steps that follow, you use the Activity Monitor to view information related
to restore jobs.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master


server system.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
238 B–234 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: To open a new NetBackup Administration Console window, open a
Terminal window, and execute jnbSA&.

3 Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

By now you have run multiple restore jobs. As a result, there are a number of
entries for Restore jobs listed in the Activity Monitor.

4 Locate the entry for the most recent Restore job. Right-click and select Details
to open the job.

The Job Details window for the job is displayed.

5 Note the two tabs included in the Job Details window for restore jobs:

– Job Overview
– Detailed Status

6 Briefly view the contents of the Job Overview tab for the restore job. Note the
information provided on the Job Overview tab.

7 Click the Detailed Status tab on the Job Details window.

8 Briefly view the contents of the Detailed Status tab for the restore job. Note
the information provided on the Detailed Status tab.

9 Scroll through the contents of the Status pane on the Detailed Status tab to
see specific messages related to the restore operation.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Close the Job Details window for the restore job.


B

11 Feel free to view Activity Monitor entries for other restore jobs before
continuing.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


239 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–235
Deactivating policies
In certain situations it may be necessary or advisable to disable or deactivate a
policy so that no further backup jobs can be initiated using the policy. For
example, if a certain client system is backed up daily using policy X, and that
client is going to be out of service for an extended time period, deactivating policy
X prevents scheduled backups of the client from running, and prevents the
subsequent job failures that would otherwise result.
In the following steps, you deactivate the winclient_test_wizard and
lnxclient_test_wizard polices.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Deactivate the winclient_test_wizard policy using the Deactivate


operation provided in the Actions drop-down menu.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_wizard policy that is


displayed in the right pane of the Policies interface.

b Click Actions > Deactivate.

End of Solution

3 Deactivate the lnxclient_test_wizard policy using the Deactivate


operation provided in the Actions drop-down menu.

Solution

a Click the entry for the lnxclient_test_wizard policy that is


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

displayed in the right pane of the Policies interface.

b Click Actions > Deactivate.

End of Solution

4 Note that the icons to the left of the winclient_test_wizard and


lnxclient_test_wizard policy names have a red X over them. This
symbol indicates that the policies are deactivated.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


240 B–236 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 6: Using OpsCenter Operational Restore to perform a file
system restores

In this exercise, you use the Operational Restore interface provided in OpsCenter
7.5 to perform restores of file system data to Windows-based and Linux-based
client systems.

Preparing for a restore to a Windows-based client system


In the steps that follow, you view the files and directories on the client system in
preparation for performing a restore of client data.

1 Access the console of the Windows-based client,


winclient.example.com.

winclient

In the following steps, you view the existing folders on the client system to prepare
for the restore of client files.

2 Log on to the client system (if necessary) using the student user ID.

Note: You may already be logged on to the client system from a previous lab
exercise. Continue to the next step.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system and select
Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Navigate to the G:\ disk volume in the Computer window.

5 Take note of the contents of the disk. Currently, two sub-folders exist on the B
G:\ disk volume:

– alt-directory
– data

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


241 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–237
6 Allow the Computer window to remain open on the client. You return to this
window in a few moments to verify the results of the restore operation.

Restoring client folders and files with OpsCenter


In the steps that follow, you use the OpsCenter Web interface to browse for, select,
and restore client directories and files to a Windows-based client system.

1 Access the console of the OpsCenter server in this lab environment,


winserver.example.com.

winserver

2 Log on to the system using the student user ID.

Note: You may already be logged on to the client system from a previous lab
exercise. Continue to the next step.

3 Right-click the WebUI Login shortcut located on the desktop of the system
and select Open.

A Web browser window is opened.


A message may be displayed indicating “There is a problem with this
websites’ security certificate”.

4 Click Continue to this website.

The Symantec OpsCenter Analytics log on screen is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Log on to OpsCenter using the following credentials:

– Username: admin
– Password: password
– Domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


242 B–238 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: If the Domain field of the log on page is blank, you may be unable to
log on successfully. This can be an indication that the OpsCenter server
services are not running on the OpsCenter server system. Notify your
instructor if you encounter this situation.

After logging on the OpsCenter Web interface is displayed.

6 Select the Manage tab.

7 Select the Restore sub-tab (under the Manage tab).

The screen, What do you want to restore? is displayed.

8 Click the link: Restore Files and Directories.

9 Click Browse and select clients link in the Select files or directories >
Search tab.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Browse Clients screen is displayed.

10 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the entry for the master server host
name: lnxmaster.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


243 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–239
11 Click the check box to the left of the entry for the client:
winclient.example.com.

Verify that the check box for the client is marked.

12 Click OK to close the Browse Clients screen.

13 Type the folder or file names you wish to search for in the File or Directory
name field of the Select files or directories screen, as follows:

mixed

14 Click Search.

When the search operation has been completed OpsCenter displays the search
results at the bottom of the Select files or directories tab.

Note: Depending upon your screen resolution it may be necessary to scroll down
in the OpsCenter Web interface to see the search results.

15 Note that an entry for the mixed folder is displayed in the search results.

16 Click the Backup History Selection link located in the Backup History
column from the resulting search table.

The Backup Timeline screen is displayed.

The Backup Timeline screen enables you to view a history of the backup
images that contain the directory or file name that you included in your search
criteria (in this example, mixed).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

17 Note the three tabs that can be selected on the Backup Timeline screen:

– Day (the default selection)


– Week
– Month

18 Click the Week tab on the Backup Timeline screen.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


244B–240 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Backup Timeline screen is updated automatically. After it has been
updated it displays a graphic icon for each of the backup images of the selected
client (created in the last week) that contain the directory or file that was
included in the search criteria (mixed).
You can select any backup image to use as the source for a restore operation.
Note that the icon legend for the Backup Timeline identifies the type of media
on which each of the backup images is resident.

19 Click the entry (icon) for the most recent backup image of the client that is
listed in the Backup Timeline

The Details of Selection pane, located on the bottom half of the Backup
Timeline screen, displays information about the selected backup image. The
radio buttons associated with the entries for the backup image are
automatically selected.

20 Click the Preview Media button.

The Preview Media window is displayed.

21 Record the Media ID required to restore the selected folders and files from the
selected backup image.

Media ID: Your answer may vary. The selected backup image was
written to tape

22 Click Close to close the Preview Media window.

23 Click the Add to Restore Cart and Close button in the Backup Timeline
window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

You are returned to the Files and Directories Restore screen.

B
24 Click the Restore Cart tab.

The Restore Cart is displayed.


The Restore Cart contains entries for all directories and files that have been
selected for restore.
The Restore Cart can contain entries selected from multiple backup images
which may originate from the same client or from multiple client systems.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


245 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–241
Note: If there are multiple entries in the Restore Cart and you select multiple
entries for restore, NetBackup can initiate multiple restore jobs to restore
the selected directories and files, as needed. Entries in the Restore Cart
are not selected for restore by default because the backup administrator
may wish to selectively restore the entries rather than to initiate the restores
all at one time.

25 Click the check box for the entry for the mixed folder that is displayed in the
Restore Cart.

The mixed folder entry check box is marked for restore.

26 Click Restore now button, located at the bottom of the Restore Cart screen.

Note: Depending upon your screen resolution it may be necessary to scroll down
in the OpsCenter Web interface to see the Restore now button.

The Restore Options screen is displayed.

27 Click the radio button to Restore all files and directories to an alternate
path location (maintaining the existing structure) on source or alternate
client.

28 Enter the following parameters in the fields provided under the Restore all
files and directories to an alternate path location... entry:

– Specify client: winclient.example.com


– Specify file path: G:\opsc-restore
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

29 Click Next to continue.

The List of selected files or directories for restore pane is displayed.

30 Click the check box for the mixed entry in the List of selected files or
directories for restore pane.

31 Click the Restore button.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


246 B–242 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box is displayed.

32 What is the Job ID of the job that was initiated to perform the restore
operation?

Job ID: Your answer may vary. The Job ID is displayed in the
File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box.

33 Click OK to close the File or Directory Restore Launch Status dialog box.

OpsCenter automatically displays the Monitor > Jobs tab.

34 Locate the Job ID associated with the most recent restore job.

Note: If the entry for the Job ID is not displayed in Monitor > Jobs, refresh your
Web browser (F5).

35 Monitor the entry for the restore Job ID until OpsCenter reports a job State of
Done.

36 Record the ending job Status code for the restore job.

Job Status: Your answer may vary. The restore job should have been
successful (Status = 0). If the job failed, notify your
instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

37 Click Logout, to logout of OpsCenter, and then close the Web browser
window on winserver.example.com.

Verifying the restore of the client files


In the steps that follow, you verify that the folders and files have been restored to
the specified alternate folder location on the client system.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


247 Lab 7: Performing File System Backups and Restores Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–243
winclient

2 Access the Computer window on the client system. This window is open from
previous steps in this lab exercise.

3 Navigate to the G:\ folder in the Computer window.

4 Refresh the contents of the Computer window.

5 Is the opsc-restore folder present on the G:\ drive?

Answer: Your answer may vary. It is expected that the restore job
was successful, and that the G:\opsc-restore
folder has been created on the client system.

6 Right-click on the G:\opsc-restore folder and select Open.

7 Note that the G:\opsc-restore folder contains a mixed sub-folder.

8 Right-click the G:\opsc-restore\mixed folder and select Open.

9 Compare the contents of the G:\data\mixed and the G:\opsc-


restore\mixed folders to verify that the restore of data to an alternate
folder location was successfully completed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

It is anticipated that the restore operation that was initiated using the
Operational Restore capability of OpsCenter was completed successfully. If
the restore was not successful, notify your instructor.

10 Close the Computer window on the client system.

You have completed all planned exercises for this lab activity. Use any remaining
available lab time to experiment further with the tasks presented in this lesson.

End of lab

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


248 B–244 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Performing manual duplication of a backup image using the NetBackup
Administration Console
• Configuring and using the inline copy feature of NetBackup to create multiple
copies of a backup image
• Configuring and using a Storage Lifecycle Policy to perform backup and
duplication operations

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.


• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


249 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–245
Exercise 1: Performing manual duplication of backup images

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to perform the
manual duplication of a backup image.

Configuring a policy to backup client data to basic disk storage


In the following steps, you create a policy to backup client data to a basic disk
storage unit. After configuring the policy, you perform backup jobs using the
policy. Finally, you locate the resulting backup images in the NetBackup catalogs
and manually duplicate the backup images.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

Note: To start a new NetBackup Administration Console, open a terminal


window and execute jnbSA&.

3 Navigate to NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

4 Click Policies.

The policies that currently exist on the master server are listed in the All
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Policies pane of the Administration Console.

5 Right-click the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media and, in the resulting


menu, click Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

6 Type the new policy name: winclient_test_bdisk_master, and click


OK.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


250 B–246 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Change Policy window is displayed.

7 Use the information provided in the table to create a new policy.

Policy parameter Parameter value/settings


Policy name: winclient_test_bdisk_master
Policy type: MS-Windows
Policy storage: bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
Policy volume pool: Not applicable
Schedule name: Full
Full schedule attributes:
Type of Backup: Full Backup
Frequency: 1 week
Retention: 1 month
Other schedule attributes: use the default settings
Full schedule start manual backups only - remove start
window windows to disable automatic backups
Other schedules: none - delete the Differential-Inc schedule
Client Name: winclient.example.com
Client hardware and Windows-x64
Operating system Windows 2008
Backup Selections: G:\data\smallfiles
Table 1: winclient_test_bdisk_master policy parameters

Solution

a Select the Attributes tab of the policy.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b From the Policy Type drop-down list select MS-Windows and for the
Policy storage drop-down list select bdisk_stu_lnxmaster.

c Select the Schedules tab of the policy.

d Select the Full schedule and select Change.

e From the Attributes tab of the Change Schedule, change the Frequency
to 1 week and the Retention to 1 month. B

f Select the Start Window tab and click Clear to remove the start window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


251 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–247
g Click OK to accept the changes.

h From the Schedules tab click the Differential-Inc schedule and click
Delete.

i Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the Differential-Inc schedule.

j Select the Clients tab of the policy.

k Select lnxclient.example.com and click Change.

l In the Clients name field, delete lnxclient.example.com and type


winclient.example.com.

m Using the drop-down list for Hardware and operating system select
Windows-x64, Windows2008. Click OK.

n Select the Backup Selections tab of the policy.

o Select the entry for /data/mixed and click Delete.

p Select the entry for /data/smallfiles and click Change.

q Change the Pathname or directive to G:\data\smallfiles folder,


as indicated in the table. Click OK.

r Click OK in the Change Policy window to save the changes to the new
policy.

The Change Policy window is closed.


End of Solution

8 View the list of policies displayed in the NetBackup Administration Console


(NetBackup Management > Policies), and verify that the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winclient_test_bdisk_master policy has been added to the list.

Perform a manual backup job using the new policy


In the steps that follow, you perform a manual backup job using the new
winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


252 B–248 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
9 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com using the
winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

Solution

a Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master


policy.

b Click Manual Backup in the menu (or select Actions > Manual Backup).

The Manual Backup window is displayed.

c Click OK in the Manual Backup window.

Note: Because only one schedule and one client are listed in the policy
there is no need to select the Schedule or Client to use for the
backup job.

End of Solution

10 Access the Activity Monitor to view the progress of the backup job.

Solution

a Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

b Locate the entry for the most recent backup job. This job used the
winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Verify that the backup job ran to a successful completion (status 0). If the
backup job failed, note the status code and notify your instructor.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


253 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–249
12 Record the information about the backup job in the space provided.

Job ID:
Storage unit used: bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
Media server: lnxmaster.example.com
backupid (see Status pane backupids vary; For example:
of Detailed Status): winclient.example.com_1332281875

Solution

a Obtain the Storage unit and Media server names that were used for the
backup job from the Detailed Status tab of the Job Details. Record this
information in the space provided.

b Obtain the backupid that was assigned to the backup image created by the
backup job from the Status window on the Detailed Status tab of the Job
Details. The backupid has the format: clientname_ctime-timestamp
(Example: winclient.example.com_1332281875). Record the backupid in
the space provided in the table.

End of Solution

13 Close the Job Details window.

Selecting and duplicating backup images


In the steps that follow, you use the Catalog interface of the NetBackup
Administration Console to browse the NetBackup image catalog for the backupid
that was created by the most recent backup job. After locating the backup image
you use the Catalog interface to manually duplicate the image.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Catalog in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


254 B–250 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The right pane displays the Catalog interface that enables you to perform
backup image-related activities.

3 Click the arrow for the drop-down menu of the Action field in the right pane of
the Administration Console. Note the operations listed in the drop-down menu:

– Verify
– Duplicate
– Import

4 Click Duplicate in the drop-down list.

Before you can duplicate an image you must locate the entry for the image in
the NetBackup image catalog. The next steps describe that process.

5 Set the search parameters in the right pane of the Administration Console using
the information provided in the table.

Parameter: Value/Setting:
Media ID: <All> (default)
Date/time range: Between: Today’s date minus 7 days / current time
And: Today’s date / current time
Copies: Primary Copy
Policy: winclient_test_bdisk_master
Policy type: default (greyed out)
Type of backup: <All backup types> (default)
Client: <All Clients> (default)
Override default priority not checked
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Table 2: Catalog search parameters

6 After entering the values listed in the table, click Search Now.

NetBackup searches the image catalog for backup images that match the
search criteria that was entered.

The search results are displayed in the bottom pane of the Catalog interface. B

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


255 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–251
7 How many backup images (Backup IDs) are listed in the search results?

Record the Backup ID of the backup image that is displayed.

Number of Backup IDs One backup ID should be displayed in the


listed: search results
Backup ID: The Backup ID varies. It has the format:
client_ctimestamp

The Backup ID recorded should be the same as the backupid you recorded
from the Activity Monitor entry for the backup job earlier in this lab exercise.

8 Record the information about the backup image from the entry for the Backup
ID that is displayed in the search results.

Policy name: winclient_test_bdisk_master


Schedule: Full
Media Server: lnxmaster.example.com
Media ID: /bdisk_stu (disk storage location)
Copy Number: 1 (one)
Primary Copy: yes

9 Right-click the entry for the backup image that is displayed in the search
results.

10 Click Duplicate in the resulting menu.

The Setup Duplicate Variables window is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Enter the parameter values indicated in Table 3 into the fields in the Setup
Duplicate Variables window.

Parameter: Value/Setting:
Copies: 1 (default)
Primary: not checked (default)
Storage unit: tape_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: duplicate_tapes
Table 3: Set Duplicate Variables parameter value settings
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
256 B–252 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Retention: 3 months (level 5)
If this copy fails: continue (default)
Media owner: any (default)
Preserve multiplexing not checked
Table 3: Set Duplicate Variables parameter value settings

12 Click OK to save the Setup Duplicate Variables parameter settings.

The Confirm Duplicate dialog box is displayed.

13 Click OK in the Confirm Duplicate dialog box.

The dialog box is closed and the duplication operation is initiated.

14 Click the Results tab, located at the top of the right pane of the Catalog
interface.

15 Note that two panes are displayed in the Results tab:

– Operation (displayed on the top half of the right pane)


– Log File (displayed on the bottom half of the right pane)

When the entry for the duplication log is selected in the Operation pane, the
Log File pane displays the contents of the log file for the selected operation.

16 According to the Log File entries for the duplication job (jbpDup-
yyyymmddhhmmss.log), what media ID was used to write the duplicate copy of
the backup image?
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Media ID used:

Viewing duplication jobs in the Activity Monitor


In the steps that follow, you locate and view the entry for the Duplication job in
the Activity Monitor.

1 Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the NetBackup Administration B


Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


257 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–253
2 Locate the entry for the Duplication job in the Activity Monitor.

3 Record the information about the Duplication job in the space provided:

Job ID:
Type Duplication
State: Done
Status The job status may vary. 0 (successful) is
anticipated.

4 Right-click the entry for the Duplication job and select Details.

5 Briefly view the Job Overview and Detailed Status tab contents for the job

6 Record your observations about the Duplication job in the space provided.

Record your observations:


Your observations may vary.

7 Click Close in the Job Details window.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


258 B–254 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 2: Configuring and using the inline copy feature

In this exercise, you configure the inline copy feature of NetBackup to create
multiple copies of the backup image at the time that the backup job runs. To
accomplish this you configure a policy that includes a schedule that defines the
details used in creating multiple copies of the backup image. After you configure
the policy, you use the policy to run a manual backup and observe the results.

Configuring a policy to create multiple inline copies

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

The list of currently configured policies is displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

3 Select Actions > New > Policy.

The Add a New Policy dialog box is displayed.

4 Type the Policy name in the field provided, and click OK.

Policy name: inlinecopy_backup


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Change Policy window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


259 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–255
5 Use the policy attribute information provided in the table to configure the
policy attributes.

Policy Attribute parameter Parameter value/settings


Policy name: inlinecopy_backup
Policy type: MS-Windows
Policy storage: bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
Policy volume pool: Not applicable
All other policy attributes: Use default settings for all other
policy attributes
Table 4: inlinecopy_backup policy attributes

6 After configuring the policy attributes, click the Schedules tab of the
inlinecopy_backup policy.

In this exercise, you configure the Full-multiple schedule to create two


copies of the backup image. The first copy is written to a basic disk storage,
and the second copy is written to tape storage.

7 Use the information provided in the table to configure the Full-multiple


schedule for the policy.

Schedule parameter name Parameter value/settings


Schedule name: Full-multiple
Full schedule attributes:
Type of Backup: Full Backup
Calendar: (not selected) n/a
Frequency: 1 week (default)
Multiple copies: Selected
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Override policy storage selection: n/a


Override policy volume pool: n/a
Override media owner n/a
Retention: n/a
Media multiplexing: 1 (default)
Schedule start window none - manual backups only
Other schedules: no other schedules for this policy
Table 5: inlinecopy_backup - Full-multiple schedule parameters

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


260 B–256 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
8 After clicking the Multiple copies check box of the Full-multiple
schedule, click the Configure button of the schedule, as shown in the screen
shot.

The Configure Multiple Copies window is displayed.

9 Use the information provided in the table to configure the parameters in the
Configure Multiple Copies window.

Parameter name Parameter value/settings


Copies: 2 (default)
Priority of duplication: 99999 (default)
Copy 1 parameters:
Primary: checked (default)
Storage Unit: bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: n/a
Retention: 2 weeks (default)
If this copy fails: continue (default)
Media owner: Any (n/a)
Copy 2 parameters:
Primary: not checked (default)
Storage Unit: tape_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: duplicate_tapes
Retention: 3 months
If this copy fails: continue (default)
Media owner: Any (default)
Table 6: Configure Multiple Copies parameters for Full-multiple
schedule
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Click OK to save the settings in the Configure Multiple Copies window.

The Configure Multiple Copies parameters are saved and the window is
closed. You are returned to the Add Schedule window.

11 Click OK to save the Full-multiple schedule.

12 Verify that the entry for the Full-multiple schedule is visible in the B
Schedules tab of the policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


261 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–257
13 Click the Clients tab.

14 Use the information provided in the table to add a client to the client list of the
policy.

Policy parameter Parameter value/settings


Client Name: winclient.example.com
Client hardware and Operating Windows-x64
system Windows 2008
Table 7: inlinecopy_backup - Client parameters

15 Verify that the entry for the winclient.example.com client has been
added to the Clients tab of the policy.

16 Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.

17 Create the Backup Selection entry: G:\data\smallfiles.

18 Verify that the entry for the backup selection has been added to the Backup
Selections tab of the policy.

19 Click OK to save the changes to the inlinecopy_backup policy.

The Add New Policy window is closed.

20 Verify that the entry for the new policy (inlinecopy_backup) is displayed
in the list of policies in the right pane of the NetBackup Administration
Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Performing and monitoring inline copy backups


In the steps that follow, you use the new policy to initiate a manual backup
operation. After initiating the backup you use Activity Monitor to view the
progress of the resulting jobs.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


262 B–258 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies.

The list of policies is displayed in the right pane of the Administration


Console.

3 Right-click the inlinecopy_backup policy and, in the menu, click


Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

Because there is only one schedule and one client listed in the Manual
Backup dialog box, there is no need to select a schedule or client before
proceeding with the backup.

4 Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

5 Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the NetBackup Administration


Console.

6 View the most recent jobs listed in the Activity Monitor.

How many of the jobs displayed are associated with the use of the
inlinecopy_backup policy?

Answer:
Three (3) jobs were initiated as a result of the manual backup you
performed. The first (lowest numbered) Job ID is a parent job. Each of the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

other two jobs is associated with the creation of one copy of the backup
image of the client data.

7 View the Job Details for each Job ID that is involved with the backup
operation that used the inlinecopy_backup policy.

Record the storage unit information for each of the three Job IDs that were B
initiated by the manual backup of the inlinecopy_backup policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


263 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–259
Job ID Storage unit used
1st job (lowest Job ID) none - this is the parent job
2nd job (middle Job ID) bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
3rd job (highest Job ID) tape_stu_lnxmaster

8 Verify that the backup jobs that used the inlinecopy_backup policy all
ran to successful completion (status 0). If any of the jobs failed, note the status
code for the job and notify your instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


264 B–260 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 3: Configuring and using a Storage Lifecycle Policy

In this exercise, you configure a Storage Lifecycle Policy (SLP) that performs the
following operations:
• Writes a backup image to AdvancedDisk storage. This backup image is
retained for one month.
• Writes a second backup image to AdvancedDisk storage. This backup image is
retained until it has been successfully duplicated.
• Uses the second backup image as the source image to create a duplicate copy
of the image on tape. The copy of the backup image that is written to tape is
retained for three (3) months.
After you configure the Storage Lifecycle Policy, you configure a policy that uses
the SLP to perform the operations specified in the SLP.
Finally, you use the policy and the SLP to run a manual backup and observe the
results.

Configuring a Storage Lifecycle Policy.


In the steps that follow, you configure an SLP to perform three operations:
• A backup to AdvancedDisk storage
• A backup to AdvancedDisk storage.
• A duplication of the second backup image to tape storage.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Lifecycle Policies in


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the left pane of the Administration Console.

The list of currently configured Storage Lifecycle Policies is displayed in the


right pane of the Administration Console. No SLPs are currently configured.

3 Select Actions > New > Storage Lifecycle Policy.

The New Storage Lifecycle Policy window is displayed.


B

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


265 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–261
4 Enter the information provided in the table in the New Storage Lifecycle
Policy window.

Storage Lifecycle Policy parameter Parameter value


SLP name: SLP1_test
Data classification: <no data classification>
Priority for secondary operations: 0 (default)
Suspend secondary operations: not checked (default)
Table 8: SLP1_test parameter settings

5 Click the Add button to add the first operation to the SLP.

The New Operation window is displayed.

6 Enter the information provided in the table below to complete the


configuration of the first storage operation for the SLP.

New Storage Operation parameter Parameter value


Source: --
Operation: Backup
Storage Unit: advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: n/a
Media owner; n/a
Retention type: Fixed
Retention period: 1 month
Table 9: SLP1_test: Backup #1 storage operation - parameter settings
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

7 Click OK to save the New Operation window parameter settings.

8 Verify that the Backup operation entry is added to the Operation list of the
SLP1_test Storage Lifecycle Policy.

9 Click OK to save the SLP1_test Storage Lifecycle Policy.

The New Storage Lifecycle Policy window is closed, and the Storage
NetBackup Administration Console is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


266 B–262 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
10 Verify that the entry for the SLP1_test Storage Lifecycle Policy is visible in
the right pane of the Administration Console.

11 Right-click the entry for the SLP1_test Storage Lifecycle Policy, and then
click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Storage Lifecyle Policy window is displayed.

The first Operation - the Backup operation - is visible in the list of operations
for the SLP.

Note: The entry for the first operation (the Backup operation) must not be
highlighted when you add the second operation in the next step.

12 Click the Add button to add the second operation to the SLP.

The New Operation window is displayed.

13 Enter the information provided in the table below to complete the


configuration of the second storage operation for the SLP

New Storage Operation parameter Parameter value


Source: --
Operation: Backup
Storage Unit: advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: n/a
Media owner; n/a
Retention type: Expire after Copy
Retention period: n/a
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

14 Click OK to save the New Operation window parameter settings.

15 Verify that the second Backup operation entry is added to the Operation list
of the SLP1_test Storage Lifecycle Policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


267 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–263
Note: The left margins of the first and second Backup operation entries are
aligned in the Operations list of the SLP. This orientation indicates that the
operations are independent of one another.

16 Click the entry for the second Backup operation, to highlight the entry.

17 Click the Add button to add the third operation to the SLP.

The New Operation window is displayed.

18 Enter the information provided in the table below to complete the


configuration of the third storage operation for the SLP.

New Storage Operation parameter Parameter value


Source: advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster
(Backup)
Operation: Duplication
Storage Unit: tape_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: duplicate_tapes
Media owner; Any (default)
Retention type: Fixed
Retention period: 3 months
Alternate read server: none (default)
Preserve multiplexing: not selected (default)

19 Click OK to save the New Storage Operation window parameter settings.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

20 Verify that the Duplication operation entry is added to the Operation list of
the SLP1_test Storage Lifecycle Policy.

Note: The left margins of the Duplication operation is indented from the entry
for the second Backup operation. This orientation indicates that the
Duplication operation is derived from the Backup operation.

21 Click OK to save the entries in the New Storage Lifecycle Policy window.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
268 B–264 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The New Storage Lifecycle Policy window is closed.

22 Verify that SLP1_test storage lifecycle policy has been added to the list of
SLPs displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

Configuring a policy to use a Storage Lifecycle Policy


In the steps that follow, you configure a policy that uses the SLP1_test policy
that you configured in the previous exercise.

lnxmaster

1 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Select Actions > New > Policy.

The Add a New Policy dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the policy name, winclient_test_slp, and click OK.

The Change Policy window is displayed.

4 Enter the policy Attribute parameter settings using the information provided
in the table.

Policy parameter Parameter value/settings


Policy name: winclient_test_slp
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Policy type: MS-Windows


Policy storage: SLP1_test
Policy volume pool: n/a
all other policy attributes: use default settings - do not change
Table 10: winclient_test_slp policy attributes

5 Select the Schedules tab of the policy. B

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


269 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–265
6 Configure the schedule Attributes using the information provided in the table.

Schedule Attribute parameters Parameter value/settings


Schedule name: Full-slp
Type of Backup: Full Backup
Enable indexing for search: not checked (default)
Calendar: not selected (default)
Frequency: 1 week (default)
Override policy storage selection: not checked (default)
Override media owner: not checked (default)
Media multiplexing: 1 (default)
Table 11: Full-slp schedule attributes

7 Click the Start Window tab of the Full-slp schedule.

8 Accept all the default settings in the Start Window. Only manual backups can
be run using this schedule.

9 Click OK to save the Full-slp schedule.

10 Click the Clients tab of the winclient_test_slp policy.

11 Add an entry for winclient.example.com, to the Clients tab of the


policy. (Windows-x64, Windows 2008.)

12 Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

13 Add an entry for G:\data\smallfiles to the Backup Selections of the


policy.

14 Click OK to save the winclient_test_slp policy.

The Add New Policy - winclient_test_slp policy window is closed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


270 B–266 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
15 Verify that the winclient_test_slp policy is included in the list of
policies displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

Initiating and monitoring Storage Lifecycle Policy operations


In the steps that follow, you use the winclient_test_slp policy you created
in the previous steps to initiate the operations indicated in the SLP1_test
Storage Lifecycle Policy used by the policy. Then, you monitor the SLP operations
using the Activity Monitor.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

2 Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_slp policy and, in the


menu, click Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

3 Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

4 Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

5 Note the most recent job entries in the Activity Monitor.

6 How many Job IDs that use the Job Policy, winclient_test_slp, are
displayed? What are the Job Types of the jobs?

How many jobs are initiated?:


Three (3) jobs that use the Job Policy winclient_test_slp are
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

displayed initially. The first job is a parent job, the next two jobs perform
the Backup operations specified in the SLP1_test SLP.

Job Types of the jobs?


The initial jobs that use the Job Policy winclient_test_slp have a
job Type of Backup.

B
Within about a minute after the Backup jobs are completed, an entry for
another job is added to the Activity Monitor.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
271 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–267
7 What is the Job Type of the fourth job that is initiated as a result of your
manual backup request? What Job Policy is indicated for this Job ID?

Job Type of the fourth job:


The fourth job is a Duplication job.This job started about a minute after
the backup jobs were completed.
Job Policy of the fourth job?
The fourth job identifies the Job Policy, SLP_SLP1_test.

8 Note that after the Duplication job has completed, one or more Image
Cleanup jobs run.

9 View the Job Details of the Backup, Duplication, and Image Cleanup jobs
that ran as a result of the manual backup request.

10 Record your observations about each of the following jobs in the space
provided (Backup jobs, Duplication job, and Image Cleanup jobs):

Observations on the first (lowest numbered) Backup job:


The first Backup job was the parent backup job. This job did not actually
perform a backup of client data. No storage unit name is identified in the
Detailed Status for the job. The Status pane for the job identifies the
AdvancedDisk disk pools and disk volumes that are used by the jobs that
perform the actual backup of the client data.

Observations on the second Backup job:


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The second Backup job writes a backup image of the


winclient.example.com client data to the disk pool and disk
volume defined by the advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster storage unit. The
backup job ran successfully.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


272 B–268 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Observations on the third Backup job:
The second Backup job writes a backup image of the
winclient.example.com client data to the disk pool and disk
volume defined by the advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster storage unit. The
backup job ran successfully.

Observations on the Duplication job:


The Duplication made a copy of the backup image that was created on
the advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster storage unit by the third backup job
(described above). The Files list on the Job Overview tab of the Job
Details identifies the backup image that was duplicated. The duplicate
copy of the backup image was written to tape using the
tape_stu_lnxmaster storage unit. Both the source disk volume and
the destination tape media ID used in the duplication job are identified in
the Status pane on the Detailed Status tab. The Duplication job ran
successfully.

Note: The Duplication job was initiated one minute after the third backup job
completed. By default, NetBackup uses the
DUPLICATION_SESSION_INTERVAL_MINUTES = 5 setting to
determine the interval at which the duplication manager process is called.
The duplication manager looks for images to be duplicated and initiates
Duplication jobs as needed. To save time in this lab environment, the
interval was changed to 1 minute by placing two entries in the
LIFECYCLE_PARAMETERS file on the master server:
DUPLICATION_SESSION_INTERVAL_MINUTES = 1
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

MAX_MINUTES_TIL_FORCE_SMALL_DUPLICATION_JOB = 1

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


273 Lab 8: Protecting Backup Data Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–269
Observations about the first Image Cleanup job:
The Image Cleanup job performed the nbdelete operation to delete
expired images from the advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster storage unit
The Status pane on the Detailed Status pane includes messages that
describe the disk space on the disk volume before and after the deletion of
expired backup images. The Image Cleanup job ran successfully.
The reason that the image was deleted is that the backup image (the image
written to the advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster storage unit) was written
with an Expire after copy retention. After the backup image was
successfully duplicated, NetBackup deleted the source backup image.

11 Close any open Job Details windows in the Activity Monitor.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


274 B–270 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B

Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration


In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Running NetBackup reports to view media and image information
• Verifying, expiring, and importing NetBackup images using the NetBackup
Administration Console.
• Configuring for catalog backups using the Configure the CatalogBackup
wizard.
• Performing a catalog backup.
• Recovering the NetBackup catalogs using the Recover the Catalog wizard.

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.


• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


275 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–271
Exercise 1: Running NetBackup reports for media and images

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to view


information and reports that enable you to manage NetBackup media and images.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

3 Initiate a manual backup of winclient.example.com using the Full


schedule of the winclient_test_tape_master policy.

Solution

a Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_master policy


in the right pane of the Administration Console.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Manual Backup dialog box.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

4 Initiate a second manual backup of winclient.example.com using the


Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_master policy.

Solution

a Right-click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_master policy


in the right pane of the Administration Console.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
276 B–272 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Manual Backup dialog box. B

d Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

5 Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the NetBackup Administration


Console.

6 Monitor the backup jobs represented by the two most recent Backup Job IDs
displayed in the Activity Monitor. Wait until the jobs have completed before
continuing to the next step.

7 Record the ending Status code for each of the two most recent backup jobs.

Status of first backup job: Status 0


Status of second backup job: Status 0

8 Open the Job Details for the first of the two backup jobs (the lower Job ID
from the last 2 initiated jobs). View the Detailed Status for the job to answer
the questions about the job:

What Media ID was used to record Media IDs vary.


the backup?
What file number on the tape did The file position on the tape varies.
the backup image occupy?
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Table 1: Media ID used for backup jobs

Solution

a Right-click the entry for the first of the two backup jobs (the lower Job ID
from the last 2 initiated jobs) and select Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

b Click the Detailed Status tab.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


277 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–273
c View the contents of the Status pane on the Detailed Status tab.

d Look for a message in the Status pane that includes “mounting mediaID”.
Record the media ID in the space provided.

e Look for a message in the Status pane that includes “positioning to file
xx”. Record the file position in the space provided.

f Click Close, to close the Job Details window.

End of Solution

9 Open the Job Details for the second of the two backup jobs (the job with the
highest-numbered Job ID). View the Detailed Status for the job to answer the
questions about the job:

What Media ID was used to record Media IDs vary. The same tape
the backup? should be used for this backup as
was used for the previous job.

What file number on the tape did The file position on the tape varies.
the backup image occupy? The file position should be one
greater than the file position used
in the previous backup job.

Solution

a Right-click the entry for the second of the two backup jobs (the job with
the highest-numbered Job ID) and select Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b Click the Detailed Status tab.

c View the contents of the Status pane on the Detailed Status tab.

d Look for a message in the Status pane that includes “mounting mediaID”.
Record the media ID in the space provided.

e Look for a message in the Status pane that includes “positioning to file
xx”. Record the file position in the space provided.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


278 B–274 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
f Click Close, to close the Job Details window.

End of Solution

B
10 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
NetBackup Administration Console.

The list of Media IDs configured in NetBackup are displayed in the right pane
of the Administration Console. The media information is obtained from the
NetBackup catalogs.

11 Click the Refresh icon on the Administration Console tool bar (or F5, or
Actions > Refresh) to update the media information displayed.

12 Locate the entry for the Media ID of the tape that was used in the most recent
backup jobs. (You recorded this Media ID in Table 1.)

13 Record the Media ID information for the tape in the spaces provided in the
table.

Media ID: Media IDs vary.


Media Status: Active
Time Assigned: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm/ss AM/PM
Images (on the tape): The number of images varies.
Valid Images (on the tape): The number of valid images varies.
Data Expiration (Date/Time): The data expiration varies.
Table 2: Media ID info from Media and Device Management > Media
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

14 Select NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

15 Click the symbol to the left of Reports, to expand the Reports object.

Running the Images on Media report


In the following steps, you run the Images on Media report.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


279 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–275
1 Click the Images on Media report.
The Report Settings screen for this report are displayed in the right pane of
the Administration Console.

2 Run the Images on Media report for the winclient.example.com


client.

Solution

a Click the arrow for the drop-down menu of the Client setting.

b Click the entry for winclient.example.com in the drop-down list.

c Click Run Report.

End of Solution

The report results are displayed in the bottom half of the right pane of the
Administration Console.

3 View the output of the Images on Media report. Record your observations.

Observations on the Images on Media report output:


Your observations may vary.
The Images on Media report for the client displays entries for all of the
Backup IDs that exist in the NetBackup images catalog for the specified
client.
• For each Backup ID, the report output shows Expiration Time of the
backup image, the Media Type that the image resides on, and the
Media Server that wrote the backup image.
• For backup images written to disk storage, the report output shows the
disk drive or file system path that houses the backup image (shown in
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the Media ID column).


• For backup images that were written to tape, the report output shows
the Media ID and File Number for the Backup ID.

4 Click the symbol to the left of Tape Reports in the left pane of the
Administration Console, to expand the Tape Reports object.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


280 B–276 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Running the Images on Tape report
In the following steps, you run the Images on Tape report.

1 Click the entry for the Images on Tape report. B


The Report Settings screen for this report are displayed in the right pane of
the Administration Console.

2 Run the Images on Tape report using the following report criteria:

– Client: winclient.example.com
– Media ID: the Media ID you recorded earlier in this exercise.
Solution

a Click the arrow for the drop-down menu of the Client setting.

b Click the entry for winclient.example.com in the drop-down list.

c Click the drop-down arrow for the Media ID field of the report.

d Click the entry for the Media ID (as recorded in Table 1) in the drop-down
menu.

e Click Run Report.

End of Solution

The report results are displayed in the bottom half of the right pane of the
Administration Console.

3 View the output of the Images on Tape report. Record your observations.

Observations on the Images on Tape report output:


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Your observations may vary.


The Images on Tape report displays entries for all of the Backup IDs
that exist for the selected client on the selected Media ID. This
information was obtained from the NetBackup catalogs.
• For each Backup ID, the report output shows Expiration Date and
Expiration Time of the backup image, the Copy Number of the
image, the Media Server that wrote the backup image, the Media ID
and File Number for the Backup ID, and other important information
about the backup images.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


281 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–277
4 Record the information about the Backup IDs that are displayed in the output
of the Images on Tape report in the spaces provided in the table below.

The number of Backup IDs present on the tape may vary. You are not required
to fill all the rows in the table.

Backup ID:
Example: winclient.example.com_0123456789 File Number
winclient.example.com________________________ 5
winclient.example.com________________________ 4
winclient.example.com________________________ 3
winclient.example.com________________________ 2
winclient.example.com________________________ 1
Table 3: Backup IDs -as shown in the Images on Tape report

5 Record the Backup ID that has the largest File Number displayed in the
output of the Images on Tape report.

Note: By default, the Images on Tape report lists the Backup IDs in descending
order, from newest to oldest backup images. The newest (most recently
written) Backup ID has the largest File Number, and should be listed at
the top of the Backup ID list.

Backup ID with the largest File Number:


Example: winclient.example.com_0123456789
winclient.example.com_______________________________________
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 Record the Expiration Date and Expiration Time associated with the
Backup ID that has the largest File Number displayed in the output of the
Images on Tape report. This is the Backup ID you recorded in the previous
step.

Expiration Date: Expiration Time:

Table 4: Expiration Date and Expiration Time of Backup ID

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


282 B–278 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
7 Right-click the entry for NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane
of the NetBackup Administration Console.

8 Click New Window from Here in the resulting menu.


B

The title bar of the new window displays Reports -lnxmaster.example.com -


NetBackup Administration Console. The Administration Console window
has access only to the NetBackup Management > Reports object in the left
pane of the GUI.

Note: Opening a second Administration Console window (or additional


windows) enables you to quickly move back and forth between areas of
interest in the NetBackup Administration Console, facilitating more
convenient administration.

9 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
original NetBackup Administration Console window.

The list of Media IDs configured in NetBackup are displayed in the right pane
of the Administration Console.

Note: The title bar of the window displays Media - lnxmaster.example.com -


NetBackup Administration Console.

10 In the “Media” Administration Console window, click the Refresh icon on the
tool bar (or F5, or Actions > Refresh) to update the media information
displayed.

11 In the “Reports” Administration Console window, select NetBackup


Management > Reports > Tape Reports.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

12 Run the Images on Tape again using the Report Settings:

– Client: winclient.example.com
– Media ID: the tape used in the most recent backup jobs.

13 Compare the following information displayed in the Administration Console


windows, and record your observations:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


283 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–279
– The number of Valid Images displayed in the entry for the Media ID in the
Media and Device Management > Media window - as recorded
previously in Table 2.
– The number of Backup IDs for the selected client and Media ID that are
displayed in the output of the Images on Tape report - as recorded in Table
3.

Your observations between Valid Images column of the Media display


(recorded in Table 2) and number of Backup IDs displayed in the Images
on Tape report (recorded in Table 3):
Your observations may vary.
• The Images on Tape report displays X Backup IDs for the selected
Media ID and client.
• The Media and Device Management > Media entry for the Media ID
displays that there are X Valid Images on the tape.
The information displayed in the two user interfaces is in agreement.

14 Compare the following information contained in the Reports and Media


Administration Console windows, and record your observations:

– The Data Expiration date and time displayed in the entry for the Media ID
in the Media and Device Management > Media window - as recorded in
Table 2).
– The Expiration Date and Expiration Time associated with the newest
Backup ID on the tape that is displayed in the output of the Images on
Tape report - as recorded in Table 4.

Your observations between contents of the Data Expiration column of


the Media display (as recorded in Table 2) and Expiration Date and
Expiration Time of the newest Backup ID that resides on the tape that is
displayed in the output of the Images on Tape report (as recorded in
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Table 4):
Your observations may vary.
The Data Expiration for the tape listed in the Media display and
Expiration Date and Expiration Time of the Backup ID from the
Images on Tape report should be in agreement.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


284 B–280 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: By default, all backup images that are written to a tape (Media ID) have the
same retention period (Examples: 2 weeks, 1 month, 6 months). Therefore,
the images on the tape expire in the order in which they are written to the
tape. When the last image written on the tape expires, the tape is returned B
to the unassigned state.

15 In the “Reports” Administration Console window, select NetBackup


Management > Reports > Tape Reports.

Running the Tape Contents report


In the following steps, you run the Tape Contents report.

1 Click the Tape Contents report.


The Report Settings screen for this report are displayed in the right pane of
the Administration Console.

2 Run the Tape Contents report using the following report criteria:

– Media owner: lnxmaster.example.com (The Media owner is the


media server that wrote the backup images that reside on the tape.
– Media ID: the Media ID you recorded in Table 1. This is the same tape you
ran the Images on Tape report against.
Solution

a Click the arrow for the drop-down menu of the Media owner setting.

b Click the entry for lnxmaster.example.com in the drop-down list.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

c Click the drop-down arrow for the Media ID field of the report.

d Click the entry for the Media ID in the drop-down menu.

e Click Run Report.

The Tape Contents Report dialog box is displayed.

f Click OK to run the Tape Contents report.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


285 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–281
The report results are displayed in the bottom half of the right pane of the
Administration Console.

Note: The Tape Contents report is unique. It does not obtain its information
from the NetBackup catalogs. Rather, to run this report NetBackup mounts
the tape and reads the backup headers on the tape to generate the report
output. For this reason, the Tape Contents report can take longer to
generate its output than other NetBackup reports.

3 View the output of the Tape Contents report. Record your observations.

Observations on the Tape Contents report output:


Your observations may vary.
The Tape Contents report displays entries for each of the Backup IDs
that exist on the selected Media ID. This information was obtained by
reading the backup headers on the tape.
• The report output displays the Backup IDs, and their associated File
Number, Expiration Date, and Expiration Time information, and
other important information about the backup images.

4 Record the Backup IDs listed in the output of the Tape Contents report, and
their associated File Numbers in the spaces provided in Table 5.

Backup ID:
Example: winclient.example.com_0123456789 File Number
winclient.example.com________________________ 1
winclient.example.com________________________ 2
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winclient.example.com________________________ 3
winclient.example.com________________________ 4
winclient.example.com________________________ 5
Table 5: Backup IDs -as shown in the Tape Contents report

5 Compare the information you recorded in Table 3 (from the Images on Tape
report) with the information you recorded in Table 5 (from the Tape Contents
report).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


286 B–282 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
6 Do the outputs of the Images on Tape and Tape Contents reports agree?

Answer: Yes.

B
7 Allow the two NetBackup Administration Console windows to remain open
on the master server system. You use these windows in the next exercise.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


287 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–283
Exercise 2: Verifying, expiring, and importing images

In the steps that follow, you verify the backup images that are resident on tape and
disk storage, expire backup images from tape storage, and import images to restore
the catalog entries for tape-based backup images. In addition, you expire backup
images that reside on disk-based storage and note the results.

Using multiple NetBackup Administration Console windows


There are many situations in which a NetBackup administrator can benefit from
having multiple Administration Console windows open. Doing so enables the
administrator to move quickly from one area of the Administration Console to
another to compare information that is reported in the interfaces.
In the next steps, you open and utilize three NetBackup Administration Console
windows to perform and monitor backup image-related operations.
There are currently two open Administration Console windows on your master
server system.
• The title bar of one window displays: Reports -lnxmaster.example.com-
NetBackup Administration Console.
• The title bar of another window displays: Media -lnxmaster.example.com -
NetBackup Administration Console.

1 Access the Media -lnxmaster.example.com - NetBackup Administration


Console window.

2 Right-click NetBackup Management > Catalog in the left pane of the


Administration Console and, in the menu, click New Window from Here.

A third Administration Console window is opened. The title bar of this


windows displays Catalog - lnxmaster.example.com - NetBackup
Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: You now have two NetBackup Administration Console windows that are
open to NetBackup Management > Catalogs. The newest of these
windows has access only to the Catalog object in the left pane of the GUI.
The other Catalog window, has full access in the left pane to the
Administration Console object tree.

3 From the Catalog - lnxmaster.example.com - NetBackup Administration


Console window that has full access to the object tree in the left pane of the
GUI, navigate to Media and Device Management > Media.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
288 B–284 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Now you have three Administration Console windows open. The title bars of
the windows enable you to easily identify each of them:
– A Media -lnxmaster.example.com - NetBackup Administration
Console window (full access to the object tree)
– A Reports - lnxmaster.example.com - NetBackup Administration B
Console window (in which only the NetBackup Management > Reports
object is available)
– A Catalog - lnxmaster.example.com - NetBackup Administration
Console window (in which only the NetBackup Management > Catalogs
object is available)

Verifying and expiring backup images on tape


In the steps that follow, you use the Catalog Administration Console window to
verify and expire backup images that reside on a tape, and view the results of the
backup image expiration using the Media Administration Console window. You
use the Reports Administration Console window to run the Images on Tape and
Tape Contents reports for the selected media ID.

lnxmaster

1 Record the Media ID listed in Table 1 of the previous exercise in the space
provided in Table 6. You use this Media ID throughout the remainder of this
exercise.

Media ID: .
Table 6: Media ID to use for this exercise

2 Access the Catalog NetBackup Administration Console window.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


289 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–285
3 Enter the criteria listed in the table below into the appropriate fields in the
Catalog Administration Console window:

Action: Verify
Media ID: use Media ID listed in Table 6
Date/time range:
Between: Today’s date minus 7 days /current time
And: Today’s date / current time
Copies: Primary Copy (default)
Policy: <All Policies> (default)
Policy type: <All Policy Types> (default)
Type of backup: <All Backup Types> (greyed out)
Client (host name): winclient.example.com
Override default job priority not selected (default)
Table 7: Search criteria for the Verify operation

4 Click Search Now.

The search results are displayed in the pane on the bottom half of the Catalog
interface.

5 Record the Backup IDs displayed in the search results in the table, in order
from newest to oldest (Refer to the Date/Time information in the search results
to verify the order in which the Backup IDs are listed).

Backup ID: Newest to


Example: winclient.example.com_0123456789 Oldest
winclient.example.com________________________ newest
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winclient.example.com________________________
winclient.example.com________________________
winclient.example.com________________________
winclient.example.com________________________ oldest
Table 8: Backup IDs -as shown in catalog search results

Verifying a backup image


In the steps that follow, you perform the steps to verify a backup image.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


290 B–286 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
6 Right-click the entry for the oldest Backup ID (smallest numeric value) listed
in the Catalog search results.

7 Click Verify in the resulting menu.


B

8 The Confirm Verify dialog box is displayed. Read the message displayed in
the dialog box

9 Click OK to proceed with the Verify operation.

10 Click the Results tab displayed at the top of the right pane of the Catalog
interface.

11 Note that the Results tab is divided in to two panes:

– Operation: displayed at the top of the Results pane


– Log File: displayed at the bottom of the Results pane

12 Locate and click the entry for the verify operation (jbpVerify-
yyyymmddhhmmss.log), that is displayed in the Operation pane on the top
half of the Catalog interface.

The log file for the Verify operation is displayed in the bottom pane of the
Results tab.

13 View the contents of the log file for the Verify operation. Verify that the
“Status = successfully verified 1 of 1 images” message is displayed before
continuing.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: The Verify operation mounts the specified tape, reads the header for the
selected backup image (Backup ID), and compares the backup header on
the tape to the backup header information that is contained in the
NetBackup catalogs.

14 Click the Search tab at the top of the right pane of the Catalog interface.

The results of the previous search operation are displayed in the bottom pane
of the Catalog Administration Console window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


291 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–287
Expiring backup images on tape
In the steps that follow, you expire backup images that reside on a tape volume,
and use NetBackup interfaces and reports to view the results.

1 Right-click the entry for the oldest Backup ID (smallest numerical value)
listed in the search results.

2 Click Expire in the resulting menu.

The Expire Images dialog box is displayed.

Read the warning message displayed in the dialog box.

3 Click Yes in the Expire Images dialog box to expire the image.

The entry for the Backup ID is immediately removed from the search results
pane.

4 Access the Media NetBackup Administration Console window.

5 Click the Refresh icon on the Administration Console tool bar (or F5, or
Actions > Refresh) to update the media information displayed.

6 Locate the entry for the Media ID recorded in Table 6.

7 Record the information provided by the Media and Device Management >
Media interface for the tape in the spaces provided in the table.

Media Status: Active


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Time Assigned: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm/ss AM/PM


Images (on the tape): The number of images varies.
Valid Images (on the tape): The number of valid images varies.
Data Expiration (Date/Time): The data expiration varies.

8 What do you observe about the Valid Images count for the tape?

Observation on the Valid Images count:


The Valid Images count has been decremented by one.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
292 B–288 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
9 Access the Reports - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console
window.

10 Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports in the left pane
B
of the Administration Console.

11 Click the Images on Tape report.

12 Enter the criteria to run the report:

– Client: winclient.example.com
– Media ID: as listed in Table 6

Note: The report criteria and results may still be displayed from the previous
execution of the report.

13 Click Run Report.

The updated Images on Tape report results are displayed in the pane on the
bottom half of the Reports interface.

14 How many Backup IDs are listed in the report results?

Number of Backup IDs displayed in the search results:


There is one less Backup ID listed in the search results now than were
listed the last time the report was run for this tape. One image (Backup
ID) has been expired.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

15 Note the File Numbers of the Backup IDs that are displayed in the output of
the report. None of the remaining Backup IDs has a File Number = 1. That
Backup ID was expired.

16 Click the Tape Contents report in the left pane of the Reports Administration
Console window (NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports >
Tape Contents).

17 Click Run Report to run the report the report settings.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


293 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–289
Report Settings:
– Media owner: lnxmaster.example.com (The Media owner is the
media server that wrote the backup images that reside on the tape.
– Media ID: the Media ID you recorded in Table 1. This is the same tape you
ran the Images on Tape report against.
Solution

a Click the arrow for the drop-down menu of the Media owner setting.

b Click the entry for lnxmaster.example.com in the drop-down list.

c Click the drop-down arrow for the Media ID field of the report.

d Click the entry for the Media ID in the drop-down menu.

e Click Run Report.

The Tape Contents Report dialog box is displayed.

f Click OK to run the Tape Contents report.

End of Solution

The report results are displayed in the bottom half of the right pane of the
Reports Administration Console window.

Note: The Tape Contents report is unique. It does not obtain its information
from the NetBackup catalogs. Rather, to run this report NetBackup mounts
the tape and reads the backup headers on the tape to generate the report
output. For this reason, the Tape Contents report can take longer to
generate its output than other NetBackup reports.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


294 B–290 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
18 View the output of the Tape Contents report. Record your observations.

Observations on the Tape Contents report output:


Your observations may vary.
B
The Tape Contents report displays entries for each of the Backup IDs
that exist on the selected Media ID. This information was obtained by
reading the backup headers on the tape.
The number of Backup IDs listed in the report output remains the same
as in the previous exercise, before the expiration of the Backup ID from
the tape.

19 What conclusions, if any, can you reach from the results you have observed in
the previous steps?

Conclusions concerning the impact that expiring an image has on the


contents of the physical tape.
When a Backup ID is expired from a tape (either manually or
automatically) there is no impact on the contents of the physical tape.
Image expiration only removes the entry for the backup image from the
NetBackup catalogs.

20 Select the Catalog NetBackup Administration Console window.

The search results from the previous catalog search are displayed in the bottom
pane of the Catalog interface.

21 Click Search Now, to repeat the catalog search for images on the selected
Media ID.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

22 Right-click the oldest Backup ID (smallest numerical value) listed in the


catalog search results, to highlight the entry for the Backup ID.

23 Click Expire in the resulting menu.

The Expire Images dialog box is displayed. Read the warning message
displayed in the dialog box.

24 Click Yes in the Expire Images dialog box to expire the image.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


295 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–291
The entry for the Backup ID is immediately removed from the search results
pane.

25 Access the Media - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.

26 Click the Refresh icon on the Administration Console tool bar (or F5, or
Actions > Refresh) to update the media information displayed.

27 Locate the entry for the Media ID recorded in Table 6.

28 Record the information displayed in the Media interface for the tape in the
spaces provided in the table.

Media Status: Active


Time Assigned: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm/ss AM/PM
Images (on the tape):
Valid Images (on the tape):
Data Expiration (Date/Time):
Table 9: Media ID info from Media and Device Management > Media

29 What do you observe about the Valid Images count for the tape?

Observation on the Valid Images count:


The Valid Images count has been decremented again by one.

30 Access the Reports - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

31 Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports.

32 Click the Images on Tape report.

33 Enter the criteria to run the report:

– Client: winclient.example.com
– Media ID: as listed in Table 6
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
296 B–292 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: The report criteria and results may still be displayed from the previous
execution of the report.

B
34 Click Run Report.

The updated report results are displayed in the pane on the bottom half of the
Reports interface.

35 How many Backup IDs are listed in the report results?

Number of Backup IDs displayed in the search results:


There is one less Backup ID listed in the search results now than was
listed the last time the report was run for this tape. Another image
(Backup ID) has been expired.

36 Note the File Numbers of the Backup IDs that are displayed in the output of
the report. File Numbers 1 and 2 no longer are included in the report output.
You have expired the backup images associated with those Backup IDs.

37 Click the Tape Contents report in the left pane of the Reports Administration
Console window (NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports >
Tape Contents).

The Report Settings and results from the previous time the Tape Contents
report was run are displayed in the right pane of the Reports interface.

38 Click Run Report to run the report again using the existing report settings.

Report Settings:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Media owner: lnxmaster.example.com (The Media owner is the


media server that wrote the backup images that reside on the tape.
– Media ID: the Media ID you recorded in Table 1. This is the same tape you
ran the Images on Tape report against.

39 The Tape Contents Report dialog box is displayed.

40 Click OK to run the Tape Contents report.

The report results are displayed in the bottom half of the Reports interface.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
297 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–293
41 View the output of the Tape Contents report.

The output of the Tape Contents report looks no different than it did prior to
the expiration of the Backup IDs.
Conclusion: When a Backup ID is expired from a tape (either manually or
automatically) there is no impact on the contents of the physical tape. Image
expiration only removes the entry for the backup image from the NetBackup
catalogs.

Note: To this point, you have expired backup images that reside on a tape volume
one at a time, beginning with the oldest backup image on the tape. Your
actions have simulated the automatic expiration of backup images that
occurs routinely in NetBackup, as the backup images reach their
Expiration Date and Expiration Time.

Expiring all remaining images on a tape


In the steps that follow, you perform the steps necessary to expire all the remaining
active backup images that reside on a tape.

1 Select the Catalog - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.

2 Repeat the catalog search using the search criteria listed in the table.

Action: Verify
Media ID: use Media ID listed in Table 6
Date/time range: -----Between: Today’s date minus 7 days /current time
And: Today’s date / current time
Copies: Primary Copy (default)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Policy: <All Policies> (default)


Policy type: <All Policy Types> (default)
Type of backup: <All Backup Types> (greyed out)
Client (host name): winclient.example.com
Override default job priority not selected (default)

Solution

a Verify the Action field is set to Verify.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


298 B–294 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
b In the Media ID field enter the Media ID from Table 6.

c For the Date/Time range enter today’s date minus 7 days.

d In the Copies field verify Primary Copy is selected. B

e In the Clients field select winclient.example.com..

f Click Search Now.

End of Solution

The search results are displayed in the pane on the bottom half of the Catalog
interface.

3 Select and expire all remaining Backup IDs listed in the search results.

Solution

a Click the top Backup ID entry that is displayed in the search results.

b While pressing the Shift key on your keyboard, click the bottom Backup
ID entry that is displayed in the search results.

All entries displayed in the catalog search results should be highlighted.

c Select Actions > Expire.

The Expire Images dialog box is displayed.

d Read the warning message displayed in the Expire Images dialog box
before continuing.

e Click Yes in the Expire Images dialog box to expire the backup images.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

All remaining Backup ID entries are removed from the search results pane
displayed at the bottom of the Catalog interface.

4 Access the Media - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.

5 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or Actions > Refresh) to update
the media information displayed.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
299 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–295
6 Locate the entry for the Media ID that you recorded in Table 6.

7 Record the information for the Media ID:

Media Status: Active


Time Assigned: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm/ss AM/PM
Images (on the tape):
Valid Images (on the tape):
Data Expiration (Date/Time):

8 What do you observe about the Valid Images count for the tape?

Observation on the Valid Images count:


The Valid Images count has reached a count of zero (0).

Note: When all the backup images on a tape have expired (and the Valid Images
counter equals 0) the tape volume is ready to be recycled. NetBackup
performs a daily operation (at midnight) to check for tapes that contain no
valid images, and then deassigns these Media IDs. When this occurs, the
entry is removed from the Time Assigned column for the tape volume. If
the tape was originally assigned from the scratch pool, the tape is returned
to the scratch pool (scratch_tapes, in this case). After this has occurred,
the tape is eligible for reallocation by NetBackup at any time.

9 Access the Reports - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.

10 Run the Images on Tape report using the criteria:


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Client: winclient.example.com
– Media ID: as listed in Table 6
Solution

a Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

b Click the Images on Tape report.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


300 B–296 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
c Enter the criteria to run the report:

› Client: winclient.example.com
› Media ID: as listed in Table 6
B
d Click Run Report.

End of Solution

The updated report results are displayed in the pane on the bottom half of the
Reports interface.

11 How many Backup IDs are listed in the report results?

Number of Backup IDs displayed in the search results:


The Error message, No entity was found (Status 227) is displayed. There
are no images (Backup IDs) displayed in the output of the report. All
backup images on the tape have been expired.

Importing backup images


In the steps that follow, you perform the steps to import backup images from a
tape. Importing the images recreates the information for the backup images in the
NetBackup catalogs. The catalog information that is imported (recreated) includes
the backup header information (metadata) and the detailed file contents
information that enables the recovery of client data (if necessary).

CAUTION When all backup images on a tape have expired, the tape is eligible
for deallocation and subsequent reassignment. The importing of
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

backup images from the tape can only be accomplished before the
tape has been reassigned by NetBackup.

1 Re-record the Media ID listed in Table 6 in the space provided in the table.

Media ID: .

2 Access the Catalogs - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
301 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–297
3 Click Actions > Initiate Import.

The Initialize Import window is displayed.

4 Enter the following parameters in the Initialize Import window:

– Media server: lnxmaster.example.com


– Location of images - Image Type: Tape
– Media ID: as recorded in Table 6

5 Click OK to initialize the import operation.

The Confirm Initiate Import dialog box is displayed.

6 Click OK in the Confirm Initiate Import dialog box.

7 Click the Results tab, located at the top of the Catalog screen.

8 Click the entry for the import operation (jbpImport1-yyyymmddhhmmss.log),


that is displayed in the Results (top) pane of the Catalog screen.

The import log results are displayed on the bottom half of the Catalog
interface.

Note: The import operation and the associated log file are related to step 1 of the
import operation that was initiated using the Import Images wizard.

9 Note the “Recreating image information...” and “Creation of database


information for import of media id xxxxxx complete” entries in the log file.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Do not continue until the “Creation of database information for import of


media id xxxxxx complete” message is displayed in the log file.

10 Click the Search tab, located at the top of the right pane of the Catalog screen.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


302 B–298 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
11 Enter the criteria provided in the table into the appropriate fields in the
Catalog interface.

Action: Import
B
Media ID: Media ID listed in Table 6
Date/time range: ---- Between: Today’s date minus 7 days /current time
And: Today’s date / current time
Copies: <All Copies> (default)
Policy: <All Policies> (default)
Policy type: <All Policy Types> (default)
Type of backup: <All Backup Types> (greyed out)
Client (host name): winclient.example.com
Override default job priority not selected (default)

12 Click Search Now.

The bottom half of the Catalog interface displays the Backup IDs that were
located in the NetBackup catalogs as a result of the catalog search for images
related to the specified media ID.

Note: The Backup IDs are listed in the catalog search results because of the first
phase of the Import operation. In this phase 1 (or step 1) of the import, the
backup headers for the images on the tape are recreated in the NetBackup
catalogs. At this point, you could not perform a restore from these backup
images, because the backup image contents (file and directory data) have
not been imported. The backup image contents are imported in phase two
of the import operation.

13 Click the top Backup ID entry listed in the catalog search results.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

14 Press and hold the Shift key on your keyboard, and simultaneously click the
bottom Backup ID entry listed in the catalog search results.

All the Backup ID entries listed in the catalog search results should be
highlighted.

15 Click Actions > Import. (Do not click Initiate Import)

The Confirm Import dialog box is displayed.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
303 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–299
16 Click OK to proceed with the import operation.

17 Click the Results tab, located at the top of the Catalog interface.

18 Click the entry for the phase 2 import operation (jbpImport2-


yyyymmddhhmmss.log), that is displayed in the Results pane on the top half of
the Catalog interface.

The import log results are displayed on the bottom half of the Catalog
interface.

19 Note the messages displayed that pertain to the import of individual backup
images, and the final message displayed in the log file, “Imported X of X
images successfully”.

If the “Imported X of X images successfully” message is not displayed within a


few minutes, notify your instructor.

20 Access the Reports - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.

21 Run the Images on Tape report using the criteria:

– Client: winclient.example.com
– Media ID: as listed in Table 6
Solution

a Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

b Click the Images on Tape report.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

c Enter the criteria to run the report:

› Client: winclient.example.com
› Media ID: as listed in Table 6

d Click Run Report.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


304 B–300 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The updated Images on Tape report results are displayed in the pane on the
bottom half of the Reports interface.

22 View the Images on Tape report results and record your observations.
B

Your observations:
All Backup IDs that were originally present on the tape are again listed in
the output of the Images on Tape report. The images have been imported
and can be used for restore operations.

Note: The new Expiration Date for the imported images is based upon the date
and time that the images were imported. For example, if the retention of the
original backup images is two weeks, the new Expiration Date for the
imported images is exactly two weeks from the date and time that the
images were imported.

23 Access the Media - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.

24 Click the Refresh icon on the Administration Console tool bar (or F5, or
Actions > Refresh) to update the media information displayed.

25 Locate the entry for the Media ID that you recorded in Table 6.

26 Record the information for the tape:


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Media Status: Active


Time Assigned: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm/ss AM/PM
Images (on the tape):
Valid Images (on the tape):
Data Expiration (Date/Time):

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


305 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–301
27 What do you observe about the Valid Images count for the tape?

Observation on the Valid Images count:


The Valid Images count has been returned to its original value, prior to
the expiration of any of the Backup IDs.

Verifying and expiring NetBackup backup images on disk


In the steps that follow, you use various NetBackup interfaces to view backup
images that reside on disk, and then use the NetBackup Catalogs interface
(NetBackup Management > Catalogs) to expire disk-based backup images.

1 Access the Reports - lnxmaster.example.com - NetBackup Administration


Console window.

lnxmaster

2 Click the entry for the Images on Media report.

3 Enter the following criteria for the Images on Media report:

Client: winclient.example.com

4 Click Run Report.

The output of the Images on Media report is displayed on the bottom half of
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the Reports interface.

5 Note the Backup IDs that have been written to Disk by examining the contents
of the Media Type column.

Note: To enable you to obtain the Media ID/Drive path information that is
associated with a Backup ID, click the column heading of the Media Type
column, so that the disk-based images are listed at the top of the report.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


306 B–302 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note: You can adjust the column layout of NetBackup reports by right-clicking a
report entry and selecting Columns > Layout.

B
6 For the Backup IDs that were written to disk, take note of the contents of the
Media ID column of the report output.

The Media ID column shows the disk drive and path to which the backup
images were written.

7 Record the disk drive and path associated with the Backup IDs that were
written to Disk storage on the Media Server, lnxmaster.example.com.
The number of backup images written to disk varies. There is no need to use all
the spaces in the table.

Backup ID: Media ID Drive/path


Ex: winclient.example.com_0123456789
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________

8 Click the symbol to the left of Disk Reports, to expand Disk Reports. in the
left pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Click the Images on Disk report.

The Reports interface is displayed in the right pane of the Administration


Console.

10 Enter the criteria for the Images on Disk report:

Client: winclient.example.com
Disk Type: BasicDisk
Disk Pool: n/a (greyed out)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


307 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–303
Path: /bdisk_stu

11 Click Run Report.

The output of the Images on Disk report is displayed on the bottom half of the
Report interface.

12 Record the Backup IDs that were written to BasicDisk storage on the Media
Server, lnxmaster.example.com.

Backup ID: Media ID Drive/path


Ex: winclient.example.com_0123456789
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________
winclient.example.com_________________

13 Allow the Reports - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window to remain open with the results of the Images on Disk report
displayed. You return to this window in a few moments.

14 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server and select
Open.

15 In the Terminal window, change directory to /bdisk_stu.

cd /bdisk_stu

16 List the contents of the /bdisk_stu directory.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

ls

17 Note the files that reside in the /bdisk_stu directory. These files are the
backup image files for backups that have been written to the BasicDisk storage
unit, bdisk_stu_lnxmaster.

Each backup image consists of four files. The four files for a backup image
have the same CTIME timestamp that is included in the Backup ID associated
with the image.
(Example: winclient.example.com_0123456789_C1_F1.0123456789.xxx).
The CTIME timestamp in the example is represented as 0123456789.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
308 B–304 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
CAUTION Never modify or delete the backup images files. Manually
modifying or deleting the files without using NetBackup
compromises the integrity of the NetBackup catalogs. Always use
NetBackup-provided interfaces to perform NetBackup catalog- B
related operations.

18 Allow the current Terminal window to remain open. You return to this
window in a few moments.

Verifying a backup image on disk


In the next steps, you verify a backup image that resides on disk-based storage.

1 Access the Catalog - lnxmaster - NetBackup Administration Console


window.

2 Click the Search tab at the top of the right pane of the Catalog window.

3 Enter the search criteria provided in the table into the appropriate fields of the
Catalog interface.

Action: Verify (default)


Media: - - - - - - - -Disk Types: Radio button selected.
BasicDisk
Media Server: lnxmaster.example.com
Path: /bdisk_stu
Date/time range: - - -Between: Today’s date minus 7 days /current time
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

And: Today’s date / current time


Copies: Primary Copy (default)
Policy: <All Policies> (default)
Policy type: <All Policy Types> (default)
Type of backup: <All Backup Types> (greyed out)
Client (host name): winclient.example.com
Override default job priority not selected (default)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


309 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–305
4 Click Search Now.

The search results are displayed in the bottom half of the Catalog interface.

The search results should list the same Backup IDs or backup images that you
recorded in an earlier step.

5 Right-click the entry for the first (top) Backup ID listed in the catalog search
results.

6 Click Verify in the resulting menu.

The Confirm Verify dialog box is displayed.

7 Click OK to proceed with the Verify operation.

8 Click the Results tab, located at the top of the Catalog interface.

9 Locate and click the entry for the most recent Verify operation (jbpVerify-
yyyymmddhhmmss.log), that is displayed in the Results pane of the Catalog
NetBackup Administration Console window.

The log file for the Verify operation is displayed in the bottom pane of the
Results tab.

10 View the contents of the log file for the Verify operation. Verify that the
“Status = successfully verified 1 of 1 images” message is displayed before
continuing.

Note: The Verify operation for a disk-based backup image reads the header for
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the selected backup image (Backup ID) from the storage location on disk,
and compares its contents to the backup header information that is
contained in the NetBackup catalogs.

11 Click the Search tab at the top of the right pane of the Catalog window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


310 B–306 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
The results of the previous search operation are displayed in the bottom pane
of the Catalog interface.

Expiring a disk-based backup image


In the next steps, you expire a backup image that resides on disk-based storage.

1 The results of the catalog search, showing the Backup IDs that reside on the
BasicDisk storage unit located in the /bdisk_stu directory on
lnxmaster.example.com, are currently displayed in the search pane of
the Catalog NetBackup Administration Console window.

CAUTION Expiring a disk-based backup image is irrevocable. When you


expire a backup image that resides on disk, both the NetBackup
catalog information about the backup image and the actual backup
image files are deleted. The information cannot be imported or
retrieved.

2 Record the CTIME timestamp that is included in the Backup ID of the first
(top) Backup ID listed in the catalog search results.

Backup ID (CTIME timestamp):


Ex: winclient.example.com_0123456789

3 Right-click the entry for the first (top) Backup ID listed in the catalog search
results.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Click Expire in the resulting menu.

The Expire Images dialog box is displayed.

5 Read the warning message displayed in the Expire Images dialog box.

6 Click Yes to proceed with the Expire Images operation.

The entry for the Backup ID is immediately removed from the search results
displayed in the Catalog interface.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
311 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–307
7 Access the Terminal window on the master server system. This window was
left open from a previous step in this exercise.

8 List the /bdisk_stu directory.

ls /bdisk_stu

9 Note the backup image files that correspond to the expired Backup ID are no
longer present in the directory. These files have been deleted.

10 Close the Terminal window.

11 Select File > Close to close the Reports - lnxmaster - NetBackup


Administration Console window.

12 Select File > Close to close the Catalog - lnxmaster - NetBackup


Administration Console window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


312 B–308 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 3: Configuring for NetBackup catalog backup

In this exercise, you use the Configure the Catalog Backup wizard to configure a B
policy that is used to back up the NetBackup catalogs and configuration files.
For this example, you configure NetBackup to perform catalog backups to both
disk and tape storage.

Configuring a BasicDisk storage unit for catalog backups


In the steps that follow, you configure a BasicDisk storage unit that is used to
backup images of the NetBackup catalogs.

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.


This window remains open from the previous exercise.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

3 Select Actions > New > Storage Unit.

The New Storage Unit window is displayed.

4 Enter the parameters listed in the table in the appropriate fields of the New
Storage Unit window, to create a new catalog_stu_lnxmaster storage
unit.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings


Storage unit name: catalog_stu_lnxmaster
Storage unit type Disk
On demand only: checked (default)
Disk type: BasicDisk
Media server: lnxmaster.example.com
Absolute path to directory /catalogs
This directory can exist on the... not checked (default)
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
313 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–309
Maximum concurrent jobs 1 (default)
Reduce fragment size to: not checked (default)
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Enable Temporary Staging Area... not checked (default)

5 Click OK to save the new storage unit.

6 Verify that an entry for the catalog_stu_lnxmaster storage unit is


displayed in the list of storage units in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

Configuring a policy for NetBackup catalog backups


In the steps that follow, you use the NetBackup Catalog Backup wizard to
configure a policy that is used to perform NetBackup catalog backups.

1 Click the entry for the master server, lnxmaster (Master Server),
displayed at the top of the object tree in the left pane of the Administration
Console.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane.

2 Click the entry for the Configure the Catalog Backup wizard.

The Welcome to the NetBackup Catalog Backup Wizard screen is


displayed.

3 Click Next to continue.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The NetBackup Catalog Backup Policy screen is displayed.

No catalog backup policies currently exist in this master server environment.

The Create a new catalog backup policy check box is automatically selected.

4 Click Next to continue.

The Policy Name and Type screen is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


314 B–310 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
5 Enter the parameters:

– Policy name: catalog_backup


– Select the policy type: NBU-Catalog (provided, cannot be altered)
B

6 Click Next to continue.

The Backup Type screen is displayed.

7 Accept the default settings on the Backup Types screen.

The defaults enable full and differential incremental backups of the NetBackup
catalogs.

8 Click Next to continue.

The Rotation screen is displayed, enabling you to set the Frequency and
Retention for the catalog backups.

9 Accept the default settings on the Rotation screen.

The default settings enable a full backup of the catalogs every week. The
backup image created by the full catalog backup is retained for two weeks. The
default settings also enable daily differential incremental backups of the
catalog. The incremental backup images are retained for two weeks.

10 Click Next to continue.

The Start Window screen is displayed.

11 Accept the default setting on the Start Window screen.


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

12 Click Next to continue.

The Catalog Disaster Recovery File screen is displayed.

13 Enter the following information on the Catalog Disaster Recovery File


screen:

– Path: /catalogs/dr-files
– Logon: none (leave blank)
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
315 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–311
– Password: none (leave blank)

14 Click Next to continue.

The E-mail Catalog Disaster Recovery screen is displayed.

15 Enter the following information on the E-mail Catalog Disaster Recovery


screen:

– Do you wish to have the disaster recovery file sent to an e-mail


address?: Yes (default)
– E-mail address: student@lnxmaster.example.com

16 Click Next to continue.

The final screen is of the Backup Policy Configuration Wizard is displayed.

17 Click Finish.

The NetBackup Catalog Backup Wizard screen is displayed.

An entry for the name of the new catalog policy, catalog_backup, is


displayed on the screen.

The Create a new catalog backup policy check box is not selected.

18 Click Next to continue.

The NetBackup Catalog Backup Wizard screen is displayed.

Note the warning message concerning having media available in the


Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CatalogBackup volume pool or in a scratch volume pool.

19 Click Finish.

20 Select NetBackup Management > Polices in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

The policies that are configured are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


316 B–312 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
21 Verify that the entry for the catalog_backup policy is included in the
policy list.

Note: The catalog backup policy that is created using the wizard provides a good B
start towards protecting your NetBackup catalogs, but may not be
configured to accomplish all of your catalog protection goals.

Modifying a policy for NetBackup catalog backups


In the steps that follow, you use the NetBackup Administration > Policies
interface to modify the catalog_backup policy that was created using the
wizard. These modifications provide greater control over the destination storage to
which the catalog backups are written.
The goals for the modifications to the catalog_backup policy are to create
two copies of the catalog backups:
• Copy 1 is written to a basic disk storage unit
• Copy 2 is written to tape storage

1 Right-click the catalog_backup policy.

2 Click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Policy - catalog_backup screen is displayed.

3 Note that the Change Policy screen has three tabs:

– Attributes
– Schedules
– Disaster Recovery
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Make no changes to the policy Attributes.

5 Click the Schedules tab.

6 Click the entry for the Full schedule, and then click Change.

7 Make the following change on the schedule Attributes tab:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


317 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–313
Click the Multiple Copies check box.

8 Click the Configure button, to configure the multiple copies.

9 Enter the information provided in the table for the appropriate fields of the
Configure Multiple Copies window.

Parameter name Parameter value/settings


Copies: 2 (default)
Priority of duplication: 99999 (default)
Copy 1 parameters:--------Primary: checked (default)
Storage Unit: catalog_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: n/a
Retention: 2 weeks (default)
If this copy fails: continue (default)
Media owner: Any (n/a)
Copy 2 parameters: -------Primary: not checked (default)
Storage Unit: tape_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: CatalogBackup
Retention: 2 weeks (default)
If this copy fails: continue (default)
Media owner: Any (default)

10 Click OK to save the settings of the Configure Multiple Copies window.

The Configure Multiple Copies window is closed, and you are returned to the
Change Schedule window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Click OK to save the changes to the Full schedule.

The Change Schedule window is closed, and you are returned to the
Schedules tab of the Change Policy - catalog_backup window.

12 Click the entry for the Differential-Inc schedule, and then click
Change.

The Change Schedule - Policy catalog_backup window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


318 B–314 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
13 Make the following change on the schedule Attributes tab:

Click the Multiple Copies check box.

B
14 Click the Configure button, to configure the multiple copies.

The Configure Multiple Copies window is displayed.

15 Enter the information provided in table for the appropriate fields of the
Configure Multiple Copies window.

Parameter name Parameter value/settings


Copies: 2 (default)
Priority of duplication: 99999 (default)
Copy 1 parameters:--------Primary: checked (default)
Storage Unit: catalog_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: n/a
Retention: 2 weeks (default)
If this copy fails: continue (default)
Media owner: Any (n/a)
Copy 2 parameters: -------Primary: not checked (default)
Storage Unit: tape_stu_lnxmaster
Volume pool: CatalogBackup
Retention: 2 weeks (default)
If this copy fails: continue (default)
Media owner: Any (default)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

16 Click OK to save the settings of the Configure Multiple Copies window.

The Configure Multiple Copies window is closed, and you are returned to the
Schedules tab of the catalog_backup policy.

17 Click OK to save the changes to the Differential-Inc schedule.

The Change Schedule window is closed, and you are returned to the
Schedules tab of the Change Policy - catalog_backup window.

18 Make no changes to the contents of the Disaster Recovery tab.


CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
319 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–315
19 Click OK to save the changes to the catalog_backup policy.

The catalog_backup policy is closed.

20 Verify that the catalog_backup policy is displayed in the list of


NetBackup policies that is displayed in the right pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console (NetBackup Management > Policies).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


320 B–316 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Exercise 4: Performing a catalog backup

In this exercise, you use the catalog_backup policy you configured in the previous B
exercise to perform a backup of the NetBackup catalogs and configuration.During
the backup operation, you use the Activity Monitor to view the progress of the
catalog backup jobs. After the catalog backup jobs are completed, you use various
NetBackup and system interfaces to view the catalog backup images and related
information.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies.

The configured policies are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Click the entry for the catalog_backup policy, to highlight the policy.

4 Click Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

5 Click the entry for the Full schedule, to highlight the schedule.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 Click OK to initiate the catalog backup operation.

7 Click Activity Monitor in the left pane of the NetBackup Administration


Console.

8 Note that several jobs with the Job Type, Catalog Backup, are added to the
Activity Monitor jobs display.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


321 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–317
Note: The number of Catalog Backup jobs that are generated depends upon the
the specific configuration of the policy used to perform the catalog backup
operation.

9 View the Status field of the Catalog Backup jobs, and verify that the jobs ran
successfully. If any of the jobs failed, record the failure status code and notify
your instructor.

10 Right-click the entry for the first (lowest numbered) Catalog Backup job.

11 Click Details in the menu to open the Job Details for the job.

The Job Details window is displayed.

The lowest-numbered job is the parent job for the Catalog Backup operation.
This job is responsible for initiating several of the other Catalog Backup jobs.

12 Close the Job Details window for the lowest-numbered Catalog Backup jobs.

13 Briefly view the Job Details for each of the remaining Catalog Backup jobs.

14 During the catalog backup operation NetBackup performed the following


activities:

– Wrote copy 1 of the catalog backup images to disk storage on the master
server /catalogs directory.
– Saved a copy of the disaster recovery information to /catalogs/dr-
files, as defined in the Disaster Recovery tab of the
catalog_backup policy.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Wrote copy of the catalog backup images to tape storage defined by the
tape_stu_lnxmaster storage unit, using a tape from the
CatalogBackup volume pool.
– Sent a disaster recovery email message to
student@lnxmaster.example.com. This mail message included
the attached dr-file.

15 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server system and
select Open.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


322 B–318 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
16 Change directory to the /catalogs directory.

cd /catalogs

B
17 List the contents of the /catalogs directory.

ls /catalogs

The files present in the /catalogs directory are the disk-based backup
images of the catalog backup. These files can be used to recover the catalogs.

18 Change directory to the /catalogs/dr-files folder.

cd dr-files

19 List the contents of the /catalogs directory.

ls /catalogs/dr-files
It may be necessary to su - root to access the dr-files directory
contents.

The file present in the dr-files folder is the DR image file that is required
to perform a disaster recovery of the NetBackup catalogs.

20 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system

21 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

The Media IDs configured in NetBackup are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

22 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar of the Administration Console (or F5, or
View > Refresh) to update the display of information in the Media interface.

23 View the Media IDs displayed in the right pane

24 Note that the Media ID 09000D is in the CatalogBackup volume pool, and
that the tape volume is assigned (has a date/time stamp in the Time Assigned
column). Note also that the catalog backup operation has written a number of

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


323 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–319
images to the Media ID, as seen in the Images and Valid Images columns for
the Media ID.

25 Run the Images on Tape report against Media ID 09000D to view the
Backup IDs that were written to the tape during the catalog backup operation.
The client for the Catalog Backup jobs is the master server,
lnxmaster.example.com.

Solution

a Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports > Images on
Tape.

The right pane of the Reports interface displays the Report settings for
the Images on Tape report.

b Enter the following Report settings:

› Client: lnxmaster.example.com
› Media ID: 09000D

c Click Run Report.

End of Solution

The output of the Images on Tape report is displayed on the bottom half of the
Reports interface.

26 Note the Backup IDs that were written to Media ID 09000D as a result of the
catalog backup operation.

27 In a Terminal window on the master server system, in which you are logged in
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

as student, execute the mail command.

28 At the mail prompt, type 1, to read the mail message that has been delivered.

This mail message was sent by NetBackup during the catalog backup
operation. The message contains important catalog recovery information.

29 Read the entire mail message.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


324 B–320 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
30 From the email message, record the missing DR image file and Catalog
Recovery Media information in the spaces provided in the table.

DR image file:
B
Catalog recovery media:
Media Server: lnxmaster.example.com
Primary Media: --
Disk Image Path (1): /catalogs___________________
Image File Required (1): /catalogs___________________
Disk Image Path (2): /catalogs___________________
Image File Required (2): /catalogs___________________
Disk Image Path (2): /catalogs___________________
Image File Required (2): /catalogs___________________
Secondary Media: ---
Media ID: 09000D
Image File Required (1): /catalogs/dr-files___________________
Image File Required (1): /catalogs/dr-files___________________

31 Allow the Terminal window to remain open, and contents of the mail message
displayed as you complete the next exercise.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


325 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–321
Exercise 5: Recovering the NetBackup catalogs

In this exercise, you recover the NetBackup catalogs using the NetBackup
Catalog Recovery wizard.

Preparing for catalog recovery


When a catalog recovery is needed because of an event such as catalog corruption
due to disk failure, you must prepare the NetBackup master server system prior to
performing a NetBackup catalog recovery. System preparation may include the
following steps:
• Replacing failed hardware
• Reinstalling the operating system or other software components to restore the
system to an operational state
• Configuring and testing network connectivity
• Reinstalling NetBackup server software
• Updating the NetBackup catalogs with the device mappings and external
attributes file
• Configuring devices using the Configure Storage Devices wizard
• Performing a robot inventory

Computer system disasters, and the associated data corruption, vary greatly. In this
exercise, you perform a few simple steps to simulate a corruption scenario that
prevents NetBackup from successfully performing future backup operations. Then,
you use the NetBackup Catalog Recovery wizard to recover the catalogs and
return NetBackup to operation.

Simulating a corruption of the NetBackup configuration


Perform the next steps to simulate a corruption of the NetBackup catalogs and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

configuration.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Close any open NetBackup Administration Console windows.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


326 B–322 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
3 In a Terminal window, execute the netbackup stop command.

NetBackup proceeds with the shutdown of its services. When the shutdown is
complete, the message, “Shutdown completed successfully” is displayed, and
you are returned to the command prompt. B

4 When the command prompt is returned, execute the bpps command to verify
that no NetBackup daemons or processes are running.

No NetBackup daemons or process should be listed in the output of the bpps


command.

5 In the Terminal window, change directory to /usr/openv/netbackup/


db.

cd /usr/openv/netbackup/db

CAUTION Exercise great care when deleting files.

6 Locate and delete the class directory.

rm -rf class

7 Start NetBackup using the command: netbackup start.

8 When the command prompt is returned, verify the NetBackup daemons and
processes are running, by executing the bpps -a command.

9 Allow the Terminal window to remain open. You return to this window in a
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

few moments.

10 Type exit, to exit superuser.

11 Launch the NetBackup Administration Console by executing jnbSA&.

12 Log in to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


327 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–323
13 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

14 View the policy list in the right pane of the Administration Console. Record
your observations.

Observations:
You should observe that there are no policies listed. Without policies
NetBackup cannot perform backup operations.

Note: On a severity scale, the level of NetBackup catalog corruption or loss


represented in this scenario is relatively minor. However, it represents a
simple scenario that calls for the recovery of the NetBackup catalogs.

Recovering the NetBackup catalogs


In the steps that follow, you use the NetBackup Catalog Recovery wizard to
perform the recovery of the NetBackup catalogs.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

lnxmaster

2 Click the top object in the left pane of the Administration Console. This is the
lnxmaster (Master Server) object.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Locate and click the entry for the Recover the Catalogs wizard.

The Welcome to the NetBackup Catalog Recovery Wizard screen is


displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


328 B–324 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
4 Use the NetBackup Catalog Recovery Wizard and the information contained
in the disaster recovery mail message (you recorded this information in a table
in Exercise 4) to recover the NetBackup catalogs.

Refer to the disaster recovery mail message as needed during this exercise. B
You can open the disaster recovery mail message, and refer to the contents of
the message during the catalog recovery operation.
Solution

a On the Welcome to the NetBackup Catalog Recovery Wizard screen,


click Next to continue.

The Catalog Disaster Recovery File screen is displayed.

b Type the full pathname to the disaster recovery file in the Specify the full
pathname to the disaster recovery file field.

Hint: You can copy the full pathname to the disaster recovery file from the
mail message and paste it to the field in the Catalog Disaster Recovery
File screen. Look for theline, DR file written to.

c Click Next to continue.

The wizard displays the Retrieving Disaster Recovery File screen.


NetBackup searches for the Media required for the catalog recovery, as
identified in the disaster recovery file contents. When the media is located,
the “All media resources were located” message is displayed. If
NetBackkup was not able to locate the needed media resources, contact
your instructor.

d Click Next to continue.

The Disaster Recovery Method screen is displayed. The radio button for
the Recover entire NetBackup Catalog. (Recommended) parameter is
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

selected by default.

e Accept the default selections on the Disaster Recovery Method screen:

› Recover entire NetBackup Catalog. (Recommended)


› Job Priority: 90000

f Click Next to continue.

The Recovering Catalog screen is displayed. The Log file pane on the
screen displays the status of the catalog recovery operation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


329 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–325
g Wait until the following message is displayed above the log file output:
The recovery job has finished. Then continue.

h Briefly review the contents of the Log file pane on the Recovering
Catalog screen. Note the warning message at the end of the log file:

WRN - NetBackup will not run scheduled backup jobs until NetBackup is
restarted.

i Click Next to continue.

The NetBackup Catalog Recovery Wizard screen is displayed, including


the message, The full recovery of the NetBackup catalog is complete.

j Click Finish to close the NetBackup Catalog Recovery Wizard

End of Solution

5 Close the NetBackup Administration Console window.

Verifying the NetBackup catalog recovery


In the steps that follow, you verify the NetBackup catalog recovery. To accomplish
this you perform the following steps:
• Stop and restart the NetBackup services on the master server
• Run backup jobs
• Perform a restore job

lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Use the NetBackup netbackup stop and netbackup start


commands to stop, and then re-start the NetBackup services on the master
server system. (You must be superuser to perform these commands.)
Solution
In a Terminal window on the master server system, perform the following
commands in order:
– su - root (to become superuser)
– netbackup stop
– netbackup start

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


330 B–326 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
– exit (to exit superuser)
End of Solution

B
2 Launch the NetBackup Administration Console by executing jnbSA&.

3 Log in to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User ID.

4 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the


Administration Console.

5 Run a manual backup of the lnxclient.example.com client using the


Full schedule of the lnxlcient_test_bdisk_media policy.

Solution

a Right-click entry for the lnxlcient_test_bdisk_media policy.

b Click Manual Backup in the menu.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Manual Backup window.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup window.

End of Solution

6 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the


Full schedule of the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Right-click entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

b Click Manual Backup in the menu.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Manual Backup window.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup window.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


331 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–327
7 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the
Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_master policy.

Solution

a Right-click entry for the winclient_test_tape_master policy.

b Click Manual Backup in the menu.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule in the Manual Backup window.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup window.

End of Solution

8 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the previous three backup
jobs. Verify that the jobs run to successful completion. If any of the jobs fail,
record specific information about the job (policy, schedule, client, storage unit,
media server, status code), and notify your instructor.

Verifying file system restore operations


In the following steps you perform a simple file system restore operation to verify
the success of the catalog recovery operation.

lnxmaster

1 Use the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI on the master server system, to
perform a restore of file system data using the following information:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Server to use for the restore: lnxmaster.example.com


– Source client for the restore: winclient.example.com
– Destination client for the restore: winclient.example.com
– Policy type for the restore: MS-Windows
– Restore from the most recent Full Backup that was created using the
winclient_test_tape_master.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


332 B–328 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
– Restore the folder, G:\data\smallfiles, and its contents to the
alternate directory, G:\alt-directory\smallfiles folder.

Solution
B

a Click the Backup, Archive, and Restore entry in the left pane of the
NetBackup Administration Console to access the Backup, Archive, and
Restore interface.

b Select Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type in the
Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

The Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window is displayed.

c Change the settings for the Source client for the restore, Destination
client for the restore, and Policy type for the restore parameters in the
Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type window as needed, to
match the information provided.

d Click OK to save the Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy Type


settings.

e Click the Restore Files tab in the Backup, Archive, and Restore window.

f Use the Backup History to locate and select the entry for the most recent
Full Backup image that was created using the Policy Name,
winclient_test_tape_master.

g The contents of the selected backup image are displayed in the Directory
Structure pane of the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

h Click the symbol to the left of the G drive, located in the Directory
Structure pane, to expand the drive contents. (Do not check the box to the
left of the entry for the G drive.)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

i Click the symbol to the left of the data folder, located in the Directory
Structure pane, to expand the directory contents. (Do not check the box to
the left of the entry for the data folder.)

j Click the icon for the smallfiles folder, located in the Directory
Structure pane. (Do not check the box to the left of the entry for the data
folder.)

The contents of the folder are displayed in the Contents of selected


directory’ pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


333 Lab 9: Protecting the NetBackup Configuration Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–329
k Click the check box for the smallfiles folder, located in the Directory
Structure pane, to mark the folder and its contents for restore.

The smallfiles folder and its contents are marked for restore.

l Click the Restore button.

The Restore Marked Files window is displayed.

m Click the radio button: Restore everything to a different location


(maintaining existing structure)

n Type the following into the Destination field of the Restore Marked Files
window: G:\alt-directory\smallfiles.

Allow all other Restore Marked Files window parameters to remain at


their default settings.

o Click Start Restore.

p Use the Task Progress window to view the progress of the restore
operation.

End of Solution

2 View the status of the restore operation using the Task Progress tab of the
Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

3 Verify that the status of the restore job is successful.

If the restore fails, note any error messages posted in the Task Progress tab.
Access the Activity Monitor to view the entry for the failed restore job.
Record the status code for the failed restore job, and notify your instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Close the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI on the master server system.

5 Close all open Terminal windows on the master server system.

End of lab

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


334 B–330 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Symantec Acronym Glossary
A D
AMS Altiris Asset Management Suite DA Enterprise Vault Discovery
Accelerator
ASD Application Service Dashboard
DC Enterprise Vault Discovery Collector
AT Symantec Production Authentication
Services DCO Data Change Object
ATRS Altiris Third-Party Add-on DDL Device Discovery Layer
Solutions
DLP Data Loss Prevention
AV AntiVirus
DMP Veritas Dynamic Multi-Pathing

B DS Altiris Deployment Solution


BE Backup Exec DRA Disaster Recovery Advisor
BESBS Backup Exec for Windows
Small Business Server E
BCM Business Continuity Management EE Enterprise Edition

BCS Business Critical Services EEE Enterprise Edition for Endpoints

BCS-AA Business Critical Services EEG Enterprise Edition for Gateway


Advanced Access EES Enterprise Edition for Servers
EMM Enterprise Media Manager
C
CA Enterprise Vault Compliance ER CommandCentral Enterprise
Accelerator Reporter

CCS Control Compliance Suite EUDPD EU Data Protection Directive

CE Corporate Edition EVOM Enterprise Vault Operation


Manager
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CFS Storage Foundation Cluster File


System EVORT Enterprise Vault OWA Resource
Tool
CMS Altiris Client Management Suite
EVPM Enterprise Vault Policy Manager
CSAPI Content Scanning Application
Programming Interface
G
CVM Cluster Volume Manager GCO Global Cluster Option
GE Gaming Edition
GIN Global Intelligence Network

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


335 Symantec Acronym Glossary Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
1
GSS Ghost Solution Suite P
PE Personal Edition or Professional
I Edition
IF Information Foundation pcA pcAnywhere
IMM IM Manager PDDO PureDisk Deduplication Option
ISTR Incident Security Threat Report PDLinux PureDisk Linux
ITMS Altiris IT Management Suite PGP Pretty Good Privacy
PKI VeriSign Public Key Infrastructure
L Services
LUA LiveUpdate Administrator
R
M RPS Remote Product Specialist
ME Mobile Edition
RTSM Real-Time System Manager
MMS Mobile Management Suite
MSDP Media Server Deduplication S
Process (MSDP) SBE Small Business Edition
MSS Managed Security Services SCSP Symantec Critical System
Protection
N SDS Symantec Database Security
N360 Norton 360
SE Starter Edition
NAV Norton AntiVirus
SEE Symantec Endpoint Encryption
NBU Symantec NetBackup
SEP Symantec Endpoint Protection
NBU PD Symantec NetBackup PureDisk
SEPM Symantec Endpoint Protection
NGNP Next Generation Network Manager
Protection
SESC Symantec Email Submission
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

NIS Norton Internet Security Client


NISM Norton Internet Security for SEV Symantec Endpoint Virtualization
Macintosh
SF Veritas Storage Foundation
NOBU Norton Online Backup
SFCFS Storage Foundation Cluster File
NS Symantec Notification Server System
SIEM Security and Information Event
O Management
OOB Out of Band Management
SII Secure Internet Interface

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


336 2 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
SIM Symantec Incident Manager or V
Symantec Installation Manager
VAC Vault Administration Console
SLP Storage Lifecycle Policy (Enterprise Vault)

SMG Symantec Messaging Gateway VCM Veritas Configuration Manager

SMP Symantec Multi-tier Protection or VCS Veritas Cluster Server


Symantec Management Platform
VIP Symantec Validation and ID
SMS Symantec Mail Security or Altiris Protection Service or VMware Intelligent
Server Management Suite Policy

SMSS Mobile Security Suite for VOM Veritas Operations Manager


Windows Mobile
VPAM Veritas Process Automation
SNAC Symantec Network Access Manager
Control VPM Veritas Provisioning Manager
SODP Symantec On-Demand Protection
VSA Vault Service Account
SORT Symantec Operations Readiness
VFR Veritas File Replicator
Tools
VVR Veritas Volume Replicator
SPC Symantec Protection Center
VxFS Veritas File System
SPN Symantec Protection Network
VxVM Veritas Volume Manager
SPS Symantec Protection Suite
SRAS Symantec Risk Automation Suite W
SSAP Symantec Security Awareness WF Symantec Workflow
Program
WPS Wise Package Studio
SSE Symantec Scan Engine
WSM Web Security Monitoring
SSIM Symantec Security Information
Manager
SSR Symantec System Recovery
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

SVA Symantec Vulnerability Assessment


SWC/R Symantec Workspace Corporate/
Remote
SWG Symantec Web Gateway
SWS Symantec Workspace Streaming
SWV Symantec Workspace
Virtualization

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


337 Symantec Acronym Glossary Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
3
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION


338 4 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Install, Configure, and Deploy
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy